JP2021007494A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of heightening equality of a game.SOLUTION: A slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excitation state to thereby constitute a state where a game ball is easily guided into a third winning port, and in this state, guide of a game ball into a second winning port can be suppressed. Hereby, passing of a game ball though the second winning port can be prevented by utilizing the slide member 450 to thereby heighten equality of a game. Further, detection means passed by a game ball flowing down through the slide member 450 can be switched by an inclined member 470.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming state in which a player can obtain a large amount of prize balls by frequently causing a movable accessory to open and entering the prize ball opening frequently is usually a gaming state. There is a gaming machine that is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the state (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-169630

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem of lacking equality. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the equality of games.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is arranged in a ball entry area, a guide means for guiding a game ball entering the ball entry area, and a game ball downstream of the guide means. The game is based on the first detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball and the first detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball when the passage of the game ball is detected on the downstream side of the guiding means. A second detection means that can give the player a benefit different from the benefit that can be given to the player is provided, and the guiding means is provided with a predetermined portion for receiving the game ball that has flowed down from the ball entry region and a predetermined portion thereof. A first, which is provided on the downstream side and is provided with a downstream side portion that is displaced in response to the displacement of the predetermined portion, and is easy to guide the game ball to the first detection means at least according to the arrangement of the downstream side portion. The state can be changed by a state and a second state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second detecting means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the downstream side portion can prevent the guiding of the game ball to the second detecting means in the first state, and the second state. Is configured to be able to prevent the guidance of the game ball to the first detection means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the guiding means includes an intermediate portion for causing the gaming ball received by the predetermined portion to flow down toward the downstream side portion.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the equality of games can be enhanced.

According to the game machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to the first aspect, the detection means through which the game ball flowing down via the guiding means can be switched by the downstream side portion.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, is the game ball flowing down through the guiding means guided to the first detecting means by the intermediate portion? , It is possible to prolong the unclear state whether it is guided by the second detection means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a winning unit. It is a rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. (A) is a front view of the winning unit, (b) is a side view of the winning unit in the direction of arrow XVb of FIG. 15 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is a top view of the winning unit in the direction view. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning unit in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG. 15 (c). It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 15C. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning unit in the line XXIIIa-XXIIIa of FIG. 15C. (A) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (A) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (A) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (A) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit in the line XXIXa-XXIXa of FIG. 15 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit in the line XXIXa-XXIXa of FIG. 15 (b). FIGS. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of a timed change in the state of the electric accessory. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the hold type, the game state, the type of a special symbol, and the fluctuation time. It is sectional drawing of the slide member, tilting member and transmission member in the line XXXXIII-XXXIII of FIG. 23A. It is sectional drawing of the slide member, tilting member and transmission member in the line XXXXIII-XXXIII of FIG. 23A. It is sectional drawing of the slide member, tilting member and transmission member in the line XXXXIII-XXXIII of FIG. 23A. FIG. 15 (c) is a cross-sectional view of a plate member, a base plate, a slide member, a tilting member, and a transmission member in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15 (c). (A) and (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. (A) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. (A) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the moving upper lid member and the moving floor member in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 37 (a). (A) to (c) are sectional views of the moving upper lid member and the moving floor member in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 37 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the first special operation pattern, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the second special operation pattern. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a time change of the second specific winning opening in the third special operation pattern. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 1 random number table, and (d) is the first hit random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 2 random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter in the first hit type selection table and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number table in the second hit random number table. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a top view of the front frame and the outer frame. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect, and (c), (d) and (E) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect. (A) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (A) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen immediately after the end of the ending effect. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the ending effect and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in 2nd Embodiment in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15C. It is sectional drawing of the winning unit in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing another example of the winning unit. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the winning unit in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the upper variable winning device in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the time change of the frame button display in the card forgetting prevention display effect, the time change of the effectiveness of the frame button operation, and the operation of the frame button.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails KG1 and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

The illustration of the nail KG1 shows the outer shape of the nail KG1 in the length direction unless otherwise specified. That is, the nail KG1 is generally formed in a shape in which the tip portion on the front side is bulged (a shape similar to a gusset needle), but the shape of the bulging portion is shown in the figure, and the nail is finely driven into the base plate 60. The shape of the diameter is not shown. Therefore, in FIG. 2, even if the gap between the nails KG1 is less than the diameter of the sphere, if the gap between the small diameter portions of the nail KG1 (not shown) is longer than the diameter of the sphere. , It is possible for the ball to pass.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 14c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails KG1 for ball guidance, a windmill WF, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and the like. 1st winning opening 64, 2nd winning opening 640, 3rd winning opening 64b, variable winning device 65, upper variable winning device 700, normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured. The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. A winning unit 400 in which a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 640 are arranged, a variable winning device 65 in which a third winning opening 64b is arranged, an upper variable winning device 700, and a variable display device unit. The 80 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The structure of the base plate 60 is not limited to the resin material. For example, it may be formed of wood made by laminating thin plate members, and various structures arranged from the front side thereof to the back surface side of the base plate 60 may be formed so as not to be visible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The above-mentioned game area is an interpretation in a narrow sense, and in a broad sense, the game area may be expressed as a flow area of a game ball until the profit given to the player by the flowed game ball is determined. In this sense, the game area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board 13. For example, the upstream path of the detection sensor 462, which will be described later, may also be included in the game area.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guidance passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

The game area 301 on the front side of the game board 13 is largely divided into a left game area 302, a right game area 303, and a lower game area 304 with respect to the center frame 86 arranged at the inner center position.

The left game area 302 is a game area in which a left-handed game ball that is launched while suppressing the firing intensity of the game ball flows down, and the right game area 303 is a game area in which the firing intensity of the game ball is increased as compared with the left-handed game ball. This is the game area where the right-handed game ball to be launched flows down. Further, the lower game area 304 is a game area in which a game ball that has passed through the left game area 302 or the right game area 303 flows down.

The lottery based on winning will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, or the third winning opening 64b is won (for example, some benefit to the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, further advantage). When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn and the ball passes through the normal winning openings 66 and 67, triggered by the fact that there is a ball that can be expected to be given (such as the profit of transition to a new state). A lottery for ordinary symbols (second symbol) is held.

In the special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (missing) is determined. At the same time, if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined.

In the special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 2) performed for the ball entering the second winning opening 640, whether the special symbol is a big hit, a miss, or a small hit is determined, and the special symbol is determined. If it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit type is also determined, and if it is determined to be a small hit of a special symbol, the small hit type is also determined.

That is, in the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the second winning opening 640, whether or not it is a big hit by the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b. In addition to the determination, if it is not a big hit, a small hit or a miss is determined.

In the present embodiment, a small hit is prepared as a winning property having a property different from that of the big hit, although it is not a loss. That is, the big hit generates an opportunity to shift the game state to a high probability state or a time saving state (a turning point of the game), but the small hit does not generate an opportunity to shift the game state.

Even if you win a small hit in a high probability state, the high probability state will not end with the end of the small hit (except when the upper limit is reached), and the small hit will be in the normal state or the time saving state. Even if you win, you will not shift to a high probability state with the end of the small hit. However, the small hit is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 65 like the big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), 32 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. The jackpot probability is an example, and can be set with various numerical values as long as the probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is not less than 1/10 of the probability in the high probability state of the special symbol.

For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed when the game ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the game is played in the second winning opening 640. The lottery of the special symbol performed when the ball enters is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 2".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined as a small hit of the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol 2 with a probability of 318/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol, 309/320. In the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The probability of a small hit is an example and can be set with various numerical values.

When it becomes a small hit (winning) of a special symbol, a small hit game is performed and the variable winning device 65 opens and closes. The player can obtain a certain amount of prize balls by inserting the game balls into the specific winning openings 65a arranged inside the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In the small hit game of the present embodiment, an operation of closing the variable winning device 65 1.8 seconds after it is opened is executed.

As the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 in the small hit of the special symbol, a single pattern may be used, or a plurality of types of patterns may be provided. For example, the operation pattern set by the number of opening / closing operations of the specific winning opening 65a and the opening / closing time may be different depending on the small hit type. Specifically, an operation pattern of opening for 1.8 seconds may be used, an operation pattern in which opening for 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times at intervals of several seconds (total opening for 1.8 seconds) may be used, or other operations may be performed. It may be a pattern.

When the special symbol becomes a big hit (winning), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a of the upper variable winning device 700, which is normally closed, is used for a predetermined time. (For example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls (specified number) are won), the opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a, so that a larger amount of winning balls is paid out than usual. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be described later when the balls are entered into the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a.

As the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c" are provided. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a after the end of the special game are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of winnings is won. Each type of special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the lottery performed based on the entry of the ball into the mouth is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It is also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the second winning opening 640. If the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is started.

In the present embodiment, even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 correspond to the corresponding special symbol (special symbol). When the variable display of 1 or the special symbol 2) is completed, the lottery of the corresponding next special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. In other words, even if the variation of the uncorresponding special symbol (for example, the special symbol 2 with respect to the special symbol 1) is not completed, if the variation display of the corresponding destination special symbol is completed, the corresponding next special symbol is displayed. A lottery will be held.

In the present embodiment, even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are the corresponding special symbols. When the variable display ends, the lottery for the next special symbol corresponding to the lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol The lottery may be executed preferentially in the order of acquisition (order of entry), or the lottery may be executed alternately in the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 may be configured to be executed with priority over the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. In this case, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0. It is possible to avoid executing the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 while the more state is maintained.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds, 2.0 seconds or 3.9 seconds) to the second winning opening 640. The ball is ready to enter. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball can enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, the special symbol lottery is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 second or 1 second) has elapsed. Later, a normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal winning openings 66 and 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B, and also indicated by the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the ordinary winning openings 66 and 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special probability change state of a special symbol (during a probability change of a special symbol accompanied by a small hit with high frequency) from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. ) (For example, jackpot A and jackpot a described later), and when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) (for example). For example, when the jackpot B, jackpot b, jackpot c) described later and after the jackpot game, the time is shortened for the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times (for example, jackpot C, jackpot c described later). , Are prepared.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the case where the probabilistic state of the special symbol is continued until the next big hit is described. For example, the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times. After that, it may be set to the normal state.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of lottery times for the special symbols described above in which the time is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times. Further, the number of lottery of the special symbol in which the time is shortened may be set to be different from the number of lottery of the special symbol to which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift.

In the present embodiment, the "special probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol accompanied by a small hit with high frequency)" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change). ), And the state is frequently accompanied by small hits. In other words, while playing the game in a state where it is easy to shift to the special game state, even before the transition to the special game state, by the small hit game. It is a state of a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained. The probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is formed in a game state in which it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a third operation pattern described later.

The "high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol)" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words. Then, it is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. The hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is formed as a game state in which it is easy for the ball to win the third winning opening 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a second operation pattern described later.

On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

Further, the "normal symbol time saving state (time saving medium)" is one aspect of the low probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, and the third winning opening is operated by the action of the winning unit 400 described later. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a second operation pattern described later.

In addition, the "normal state" is an aspect of a low probability state (a state that is not a high probability state) of a special symbol, and is a state of a game that is not in a short time of a normal symbol (the jackpot probability is also a normal symbol (second symbol)). The probability of winning the ball has not changed, and it is not easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b). The electric accessory 640a is operated in the first operation pattern described later.

During the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and basically compared with the normal state. , The state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b is set to be maintained for a long time.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state (that is, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is arranged at the front side position and enters the first throwing path KR1). Compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state (excited state, that is, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is arranged at the rear side position and retracted from the first throwing path KR1). , The game ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b side. Therefore, during the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b, and the special symbol lottery is performed. It becomes easy to be damaged.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when it hits a normal symbol may be increased as compared with the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) does not change, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol (No. 1) Only the hit probability of 2 symbols) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b or the second winning opening 640. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special probability change, the probability change, the time reduction, or the normal state, and indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not. Depending on the state, whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a special probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a small hit, or a missed symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or is held. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

The ball enters the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, or the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When a ball is hit, the number of balls entered is for each type of winning opening (that is, for each type of special symbol, and the number of times of entering the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special The number of balls entered into the second winning opening 640 corresponding to symbol 2 is different), and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the third symbol display. It is also shown in the device 81.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b and the ball entering the second winning opening 640 are each held up to four times. The maximum number of holdings is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8).

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, or the second winning opening 640 has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R special probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 4R jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R special probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a special probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol with a high frequency and a small hit) after a jackpot of 15 rounds. The "8R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 8 rounds.

In addition, the "4R jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, and is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), or is maximum. It is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with 4 rounds.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.

The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, and the second winning opening 640, and the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is displayed. Passage of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a ball of a normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67. The second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that fluctuately display the second symbol with the trigger, and the second symbol indicating the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game balls have passed through the normal winning openings 66 and 67 by the lighting state. A hold lamp 84 is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned in a variable display (same main symbol). (Variation display) that finally stops when all the players are aligned) is performed, and a big hit occurs (the transition to the special gaming state starts) after the fluctuation display is completed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when the same main symbols are not aligned) is performed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, a variable display is performed in which the specific small hit symbol is finally stopped.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a special probability variation jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, a variable display is performed in which the symbol to which the characters "Prize ball preparation" is added stops at the center of the display area of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting a normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to pick up the game ball in the electric accessory 640a arranged on the upstream side of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the third winning opening 64b or the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the third winning opening 64b or the third winning opening 64b or the third winning opening 64b or the third winning opening 64b or the third winning opening 64b or the third winning opening 64b or the third prize opening 64b 2 When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the winning opening 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80, and flow down the left side game area 302 or the right side game area 303 among the balls launched into the game area 301. It is arranged at a position where the ball to pass is sure to pass (the nail KG1 arrangement on the upstream side is configured to collect the ball at the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67).

The relationship between the ball launched into the game area 301 and the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is not limited to this. For example, among the balls launched into the game area 301, a part of the flowing balls may be configured to pass through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67.

The number of times the balls have passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol is held. It is also lit and displayed on the lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the first symbol display device 37A and 37B. 3 It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp 84.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is not limited to four, but may be three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may set it. Further, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 arranged on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, but may be one, or a plurality of others (for example, three or more). It may be.

Further, the assembly positions of the ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, either the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the variable display. It may be above or below the device unit 80.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the passage of the ball is detected by the first winning opening switch (detection sensor 442 described later) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13, and the first winning opening switch is turned on. The special symbol 1 is drawn by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (detection sensor 462 described later) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 2 is made at 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

It should be noted that the second winning opening 640 is configured so that only the ball passing through the inside of the winning unit 400 wins a prize, and winning without passing through the winning unit 400 is prevented. The details will be described later.

Further, below the front view of the second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 64b where a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the third winning opening 64b, the third winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the third winning opening switch. A lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

The third winning opening 64b is configured so that only the ball passing through the inside of the winning unit 400 wins a prize, and winning without passing through the winning unit 400 is prevented. The details will be described later.

Further, in the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, and the second winning opening 640, the first winning opening switch, the third winning opening switch, or the second winning opening switch are turned on when the ball wins, respectively. It is also one of the winning openings (prize ball openings) where five balls are paid out as prize balls based on.

In this embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640. The same configuration, but the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640. A different number, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b is three, and the number of winning balls paid out when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. May be configured as five. Further, the number of prize balls and the magnitude relationship between the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640 (and the third winning opening 64b). In this electric accessory 640a, normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state (forward closed state), and it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, it is electrically operated. The accessory 640a is in an excited state (backward open state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

During the special probability change of the special symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as provided in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit A, a) in which the maximum profit (the number of prize balls in the special game state) is obtained as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball goes to the second winning opening 640. The case where a prize is won is set higher than the case where the ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, during normal times, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second winning opening 640 due to the electric accessory 640a arranged on the upstream side of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b, so that the electric accessory 640a A player who shoots a ball with a firing strength that makes it easy for the ball to reach the first winning opening 64, obtains many opportunities for a big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64, and aims to become a big hit. It will be advantageous for.

On the other hand, during the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 to allow the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening. When the operation of the electric accessory 640a arranged on the upstream side of the 64b is controlled, the ball is easily picked up by the electric accessory 640a, and the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b is easily won. The ball is launched with a firing strength that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is operated by passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, and the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening is used. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the mouth 64b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment depends on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special probabilistic state, probabilistic change, time saving, normal, etc.). Let the player change the method of firing the ball between firing at a firing strength at which the ball easily reaches the first winning opening 64 and firing at a firing strength at which the ball easily reaches the electric accessory 640a. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the electric accessory 640a is driven in the same operation pattern as in the normal state of the special symbol. Therefore, it can be configured so that it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the case where both the ball flowing down the left game area 302 and the ball flowing down the right side flowing area 303 can reach the first winning opening 64 or the electric accessory 640a has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be configured so that only the ball that has flowed down the left flow-down area 302 reaches the electric accessory 640a, and only the ball that has flowed down the right-side flow-down area 303 may reach the electric accessory 640a.

In this case, during normal operation, the ball is launched toward the first winning opening 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and then to the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to get a lot of big hit lottery machines by winning the prize and aim to be a big hit.

On the other hand, during the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, so that the electric role attached to the second winning opening 640 When the operation of the object 640a is controlled, the ball is easily picked up by the electric accessory 640a, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the variable display device is directed toward the side where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. A ball is launched so that the ball passes to the right side of the unit 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is operated by passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, and the second winning opening 640. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning a prize.

As a result, the player can be made to change the method of firing the ball between "left-handed" and "right-handed" according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

Further, in this case, in a situation where "right-handed" should be performed, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) on the third symbol display device 81, the player can perform the (special) probability change state of the special symbol or the normal symbol. It may be configured to surely obtain the benefit of being in the state of shortening the time.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player obtains the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

In addition, when the player is performing "right-handed" in spite of the situation in which "left-handed" should be performed, the player is informed that the recommended game mode and the game mode being executed are different. It is preferable to be able to notify the person. For example, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

For example, in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning opening 640 (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second winning opening 640). Suppose. In this case, if a right-handed player is hit in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is shot at the first winning opening 64 by the left-handed player. That is, if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed!" Are displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed hitting in a normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not a ball is hitting right, whether or not the ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. It should be judged by.

Further, it is easy to configure to display a right-handed warning image when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during a big hit game or a small hit game, an illegal game (not limited to a right-handed game, for example, a variable winning game) Even if it is determined that a load is applied to the device 65 to open the specific winning opening 65a and a game mode in which the game ball is forcibly entered) is performed, and a right-handed warning image is displayed. Good. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image.

Further, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the big hit game or the small hit game, a signal indicating that the hall computer is fraudulent is performed. May be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraudulent activity is being performed.

Further, for example, by narrowing the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80, a range in which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in the range. You may do so. In this case, it can be determined that the right-handed hit is performed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

Further, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a wind turbine) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position (corresponding to the left and right center position in FIG. 2) of the variable display device unit 80 may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is launched, it can be determined that the right-handed hit is performed based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing.

In the present embodiment, a variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol performed due to the winning of the second winning opening 640, the small hit is stopped after the predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the small hit is notified. After that, a small hit game in which the ball is easy to win is executed. As this small hit game, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 1.8 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls (specified number) are won).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is obtained in a lottery of special symbols performed due to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, or the second winning opening 640, a predetermined time (variable time) ) Elapses, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a, which is normally closed, is used for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls (specified number) are won). Be released.

The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). , 15) prize balls will be paid out based on the prize of one ball.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing the opening / closing plate. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate forward to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state are obtained. It operates so as to repeat the state of. The opening / closing mode of the second specific winning opening 700a will be described later.

The variable winning device 65 not only enters a ball that has passed through the inside of the winning unit 400, but also a ball that flows down by being guided by the nail KG1 on the left and right outside of the winning unit 400 without entering the winning unit 400. The lateral length is designed to obtain. That is, the width of the specific winning opening 65a is designed to be longer than the width of the winning unit 400.

Whether or not it is easy to be guided inside the winning unit 400 depends on the state of the nail KG1 arranged on the upstream side of the winning unit 400, but in the present embodiment, the player is advantageous depending on the state of the nail KG1. It is possible to prevent it from becoming too much or too disadvantageous (it is possible to balance the advantages).

That is, for example, when the ball is likely to be guided inside the winning unit 400 with a high probability, the ball is passed through the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b where the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit 400. It is advantageous for the player to be able to frequently receive the lottery of special symbols during the time saving for receiving the lottery or during the probability change.

On the other hand, when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 65 in a big hit game or a small hit game, the ball entering the inside of the winning unit 400 reaches the second winning opening 640 or the second winning opening 640 or the second before reaching the variable winning device 65. 3 The number of balls that are picked up by the winning opening 64b and reach the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. In addition, if there are few balls that deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down to the left and right outside of the winning unit 400, it is disadvantageous for the game in which the winning balls are frequently paid out by entering the specific winning opening 65a. is there.

Further, for example, when the probability that the ball is guided inside the winning unit 400 is low, the ball is passed through the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b where the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit 400. During the time reduction for receiving the lottery or during the probability change, the interval for receiving the lottery for the special symbol tends to be long, which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of game efficiency.

On the other hand, when a ball is inserted into the variable winning device 65 in a big hit game or a small hit game, since there are few balls that enter the inside of the winning unit 400, they are picked up by the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b. The number of balls that cannot reach the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. In addition, since many balls deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down to the left and right outside of the winning unit 400, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a large number of balls are allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Since it can be expected that a large amount of prize balls will be paid out, it will be advantageous for the player.

In this way, even if the state of the nail KG1 makes it easy for the ball to be guided inside the winning unit 400 or the ball is difficult to be guided, the state of the nail KG1 wins a special symbol lottery and wins a big hit. If it works in favor of the player during the target period, it can work against the player during the jackpot game, while the state of the nail KG1 wins the lottery of the special symbol and the player aims for the jackpot. If it works disadvantageously, it can work in the player's favor during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous or too disadvantageous depending on the state of the nail KG1 (the advantage can be balanced).

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a Alternatively, the second specific winning opening 700a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is open, the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a. As a special gaming state, a gaming state in which the large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed.

Further, the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is not limited to two, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of three or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the first winning opening 64. Not limited to the lower side, for example, the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 64b, 65a, 640, 700a has the first out opening 71, the left out opening 71L, or the right out opening 71R. You will be guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64. The left out opening 71L is arranged on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the right out opening 71R is arranged on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the present embodiment, since the specific winning opening 65a is arranged near the lower edge of the game area, the gap between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a is narrow. Therefore, if a plurality of balls that roll on the lower edge of the game area on the left and right outer sides of the specific winning opening 65a are all directed toward the first out opening 71, a ball is formed between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a. Clogs may occur, which causes the game to be interrupted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the left out opening 71L and the right out opening 71R, a ball that rolls on the lower edge of the game area on the left and right outer sides of the specific winning opening 65a is the first out opening. Before heading to 71, the ball can be discharged through the left out port 71L or the right out port 71R into a ball discharge path (not shown). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball is clogged between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a, so that it is possible to avoid interruption of the game.

A large number of nails KG1 are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine WF are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning unit 400 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the winning unit 400, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the winning unit 400 is screwed into the base plate 60 when it is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 so as to close the opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The plate member 410 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 411 through which the fastening screws are inserted.

That is, the portion on the front side of the plate member 410 is a portion arranged between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and is on the back side of the plate member 410. The portion is a portion disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 with respect to the front side surface facing the glass unit 16.

The plate member 410 of the winning unit 400 is provided with a ball receiving portion 412 formed in a shape capable of receiving a ball from above and throwing the ball rearward at the center position on the left and right of the upper end portion, and from the ball receiving portion 412 to the rear. The thrown ball enters the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13.

Among the balls guided inside the winning unit 400, some of the balls are configured to win in the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2). The ball is once thrown backward inside the winning unit 400, then the flow direction is reversed back and forth, and after being placed on the front side of the plate member 410 again, the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b The details of the flow of the ball will be described later.

7 and 9 are an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit 400, and FIGS. 8 and 10 are an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit 400. 7 and 8 show a non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a, and FIGS. 9 and 10 show an excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a. The details of the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a in the non-excited state and the excited state will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the winning unit 400 is attached to a plate member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and a plate member 410 that is arranged on the front side of the plate member 410. The front design member 420 to be fastened and fixed, the middle stage member 430 arranged on the back side of the plate member 410 and fastened and fixed to the plate member 410, and the middle stage member 430 arranged above the middle stage member 430 and fastened and fixed to the middle stage member 430. The upper member 440 and the slide member 450 which is supported by the middle member 430 so as to be slidable back and forth between the middle member 430 and the upper member 440 and constitutes the electric accessory 640a.

The plate member 410 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a central opening 413 that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a horizontal width that allows a sphere to pass through at the left and right center positions and is long in the vertical direction, and a central opening 413 thereof. A ball passing opening 414 is bored in a size that allows a ball to pass after riding on the front tip of the slide member 450 on the upper right side of the upper end of the slide member 450, and continuously below the ball passing opening 414. A sliding opening 415 that is formed and expanded to the left and right outside the width of the ball passing opening 414 so that the slide member 450 can be inserted, and a protrusion of the middle member 430 that is continuously formed under the sliding opening 415. A support opening 416 that is bored in a substantially rectangular shape corresponding to the outer shape of the portion 437a and through which the protruding portion 437a is inserted and supported, and a support opening 416 that is continuously formed under the support opening 416 and has a left-right width that allows a ball to pass through. The ball discharge opening 417 is provided.

Since the ball passage opening 414, the sliding opening 415, the support opening 416, and the ball discharge opening 417 are symmetrically configured, the same reference numerals are given to the left configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The central opening 413 is an opening through which a ball guided by the central flow path 431 of the middle member 430 and flowing down to the front side passes to the front side. Further, in the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a, the ball also functions as an opening that passes to the back side and is guided by the second winning opening switch (detection sensor 462 described later). To do.

The ball passage opening 414 is an opening through which a ball on the slide member 450 in a non-excited state (see FIG. 5) can pass on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 is guided to the back side of the plate member 410 by passing through the ball passage opening 414.

The sliding opening 415 is an opening that supports the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 in a manner of sliding during the front-rear movement of the slide member 450. The plate member 410 includes a slide support portion 418 extending rearward from the left and right ends of the sliding opening 415 while maintaining the shape of the inner surface of the sliding opening 415. As a result, the slide member 450 can be supported at a position rearward from the sliding opening 415. Therefore, even when the slide member 450 is displaced by a displacement width equal to or larger than the front-rear width of the sliding opening 415, the slide member 450 is displaced. The displacement of 450 can be stabilized.

Through the support opening 416, the protruding portion 437a of the middle member 430 projects to the front side. The protrusion 437a of the middle member 430 is provided with an opening 435a of a detection sensor 435 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, among the spheres received by the non-excited slide member 450, the spheres that did not pass through the sphere passage opening 414 before the slide member 450 was excited are arranged directly below the sphere in front of the support opening 416. It passes through the opening 435a to be provided.

The ball discharge opening 417 is an opening for allowing the ball to pass through the opening 435a arranged on the front side of the support opening 416 and for sending the ball to the back side.

The front design member 420 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and can accept the lower edge portion of the ball receiving portion 412 at the front plate portion 421 forming the design surface and the upper left and right center positions of the front plate portion 421. A joint portion 422 that is formed so as to project from the back side in a unique shape, a pair of partition plates 423 that extend downward from the lower end portion of the joint portion 422 in pairs on the left and right, and a middle stage in the lower portion of the partition plate 423. A support portion 424 formed so as to project outward to the left and right at a height position capable of supporting the protruding portion 437a of the member 430, and a front plate portion 421 as a curved wall forming a flow path of a sphere below the support portion 424. A curved wall portion 425 that is formed so as to project rearward from the sphere, a pair of left and right eaves 426 that are formed so as to project from the upper edge of the joint portion 422 toward the left and right outside and are formed so that the flow direction of the sphere can be changed. A pair of left and right ball guide ridges 427 are provided so as to project from the rear side surface to the rear side of the front plate portion 421 on the left and right outside and below the eaves portion 426.

Since the front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, even if the front plate portion 421 covers the front plate portion 421 from the front side, the configuration on the back side thereof and the flowing sphere can be visually recognized through the front plate portion 421. can do. That is, the player can visually recognize the state of the electric accessory 640a (sliding member 450 and tilting member 470) and the flow mode of the ball on the back side of the front plate portion 421.

Since the joint portion 422 is formed from a shape capable of accepting the ball receiving portion 412 so that the joint with the lower edge of the ball receiving portion 412 of the plate member 410 is not conspicuous, the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 are formed. Can be seen integrally in front view (see FIG. 5).

Therefore, not only the design in which the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 form separate designs, but also the design in which the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 are combined to form a completed design may be made.

The joint portion 422 also has a function of limiting the flow direction of the sphere on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 in the non-excited state is prevented from directly flowing into the left and right center positions with the force of flowing down to the left and right inward by colliding with the joint portion 422. That is, the flow path of the sphere received on the slide member 450 is limited by the state of the slide member 450 and the joint portion 422.

Therefore, the ball received by the non-excited slide member 450 is guided to the rear on the slide member 450, or is arranged on the front side of the support opening 416 by switching the slide member 450 to the excited state. You will be guided to the opening 435a.

The partition plate 423 has a function of limiting the flow direction of the sphere on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, by disposing the partition plate 423, the ball that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front side is prevented from being discharged to the left and right outside, and the flow path of the ball is restricted so as to flow exclusively downward. doing.

The curved wall portion 425 is formed so that the flow path of the sphere flows outward to the left and right. As a result, it is easy to distinguish between a sphere guided by the curved wall portion 425 and flowing backward through the ball discharge opening 417 and a sphere flowing backward through the central opening 413 in a front view.

Further, unlike the case where the flow path of the sphere is formed so as not to flow to the left and right outside, a specific member is arranged by leaving a left-right distance between the front-rear position of the central opening 413 and the front-rear position of the sphere discharge opening 417. Space can be secured. In the present embodiment, a space (reception recess 465) for arranging a member (first member 481) for transmitting a driving force to the electric accessory 640a is formed, which will be described in detail later.

The upper side surface of the eaves portion 426 is formed as a smooth surface having the same inclination as the upper side surface of the joint portion 422, and functions as a portion for switching the flow direction of the sphere on the left and right upper side surfaces of the joint portion 422 to the left and right outer directions. However, the details will be described later.

The ball guide ridge 427 is formed along the flow path of the ball that flows down toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 among the balls on the slide member 450, and functions as a portion that comes into contact with the flowing ball. ..

As a result, even if the rear side surface of the front plate portion 421 is worn and worn due to rubbing against the ball after long-term use, the ball and the front plate can be worn from the tip of the ball guide ridge 427. The contact area with the rear side surface of the portion 421 can be kept small.

Further, since the front design member 420 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the degree of transmission is reduced by scratches regardless of whether it occurs on the front side or the back side. In other words, the larger the area where scratches occur, the more difficult it is to visually recognize the member arranged behind the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In the present embodiment, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transmission of the front design member 420 in order to ensure the visibility of the sphere flowing down the back surface side of the front design member 420.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the location where the scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge 427, the scratches generated on the front design member 420 can be minimized, and the visibility of the flowing ball can be improved. Can be secured.

The middle member 430 is a member that supports the slide member 450, and is arranged below the central flow path 431 formed at a position sandwiched between the slide member 450 from the left-right direction and the slide member 450 in a non-excited state. It is provided with a pair of left and right detection sensors 435.

The central flow path 431 is formed with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and is erected upward so as to prevent the passage of the sphere on the left and right sides of the bottom surface portion 431a which is formed and tilts downward toward the front side. It is provided with a left wall portion 432 and a right wall portion 433, and a rear wall portion 434 erected upward so as to prevent the passage of a ball behind the bottom wall portion 431a.

The left wall portion 432 is configured to secure a gap 432a having a front-rear width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere with the rear wall portion 434, and the right wall portion 433 has the diameter of the sphere with the rear wall portion 434. It is configured to secure a gap 433a having a front-rear width slightly longer than that.

The gap 433a is arranged at a position shifted to the front side with respect to the gap 432a. In the present embodiment, the gaps 432a and 433a are arranged so that the front-end ends of the gap 432a and the rear-end ends of the gap 433a substantially match each other in the front-rear direction.

The left wall portion 432 has an alignment portion 432b formed in a shape such that the upper half portion is cut out from the rear end portion. The right wall portion 433 has an alignment portion 433b formed in a shape such that the upper half portion is cut out from the rear end portion. The alignment portions 432b and 433b are used for alignment when the upper member 440 is assembled to the middle member 430, and the details will be described later.

On the rear side of the left wall portion 432, the right side surface facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the left side surface not facing the central flow path 431 has a shorter left-right width than the front side portion. A notch 432c is formed.

In the rear side portion of the right wall portion 433, the left side surface facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the right side surface not facing the central flow path 431 has a shorter left-right width than the front side portion. A notch 433c is formed.

The cutout portions 432c and 433c are formed with the same front-rear width and function to avoid interference with the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450 during slide movement, which will be described in detail later.

The rear wall portion 434 is formed as a curved wall portion connecting the rear ends of the gaps 432a and 433a. As a result, the ball that has passed through the gap 432a and abuts on the rear wall portion 434 can be smoothly turned to the front side.

The detection sensor 435 is configured as a detection sensor that does not involve a lottery of symbols even if the passage of a ball is detected. That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor 435, neither the lottery of the special symbol nor the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the prize ball is paid out. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor 435 is controlled so that five prize balls are paid out in response to the detection of the winning of one ball.

The upper member 440 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an upper flow path constituent portion 441 forming a flow path that is inclined backward for the ball received by the ball receiving portion 412 to flow down, and an upper flow path thereof. A detection sensor 442 that detects a sphere that has flowed down the road constituent portion 441, and an upper lid member 443 that is fastened and fixed as the upper lid of the upper flow path constituent portion 441 to fix the detection sensor 442 to the upper flow path constituent portion 441, and at least the middle stage. It includes a ceiling component 444 that constitutes the ceiling of the central flow path 431 of the member 430, and a left wall portion 445 and a right wall portion 446 that guide the flow of a sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the slide member 450.

Since the upper member 440 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the spherical flow path (central flow path 431) below the upper member 440 in the player's line of sight looking down at the winning unit 400 via the base plate 60. And the flow path guided by the slide member 450) can be visually recognized through the upper member 440. That is, the player can visually recognize the ball that rolls on the slide member 450 and flows down the central flow path 431.

The detection sensor 442 detects a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor 442, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

In the upper lid member 443, the path through which the ball flows to the left side is arranged on the rear side of the rear end portion of the left side wall portion 445. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball flowing down the upper flow path constituent portion 441 is arranged above the flow path guided by the left wall portion 445. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere guided by the left wall portion 445 from being lowered by the sphere flowing down the upper flow path constituent portion 441.

The left side wall portion 445 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center side at the rear end portion. The front-rear position of the tip portion on the left-right center side of the curved portion coincides with the front-rear position of the left end portion of the rear wall portion 434 of the middle stage member 430.

The right side wall portion 446 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center side at the rear end portion. The front-rear position of the tip portion on the left-right center side of the curved portion coincides with the front-rear position of the right end portion of the rear wall portion 434 of the middle stage member 430.

That is, both the left side wall portion 445 and the right side wall portion 446 are formed so as to be connected to the rear wall portion 434 forming the rear end portions of the gaps 432a and 433a of the middle stage member 430, and guide the sphere to the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured. That is, the rear end portion of the right side wall portion 446 is arranged at a position shifted to the front side as compared with the rear end portion of the left side wall portion 445.

The slide member 450 is formed of a non-permeable resin material, and has a pair of left and right tip portions 451 and a left guide plate portion 452 and a right guide plate portion 453 extending rearward from the left and right inner portions of the tip portions 451. , A central fixing portion 454 for connecting and fixing the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 at the rear end portion.

Since the slide member 450 is formed of a non-permeable resin material, the sphere flowing down the lower side of the slide member 450 (for example, the sphere flowing down the left and right paths 463 of the lower member 460) is hidden by the slide member 450 (visible). It can be shielded so that it is difficult. As a result, even when the middle member 430 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, a sphere that rolls on the slide member 450 and a sphere that flows down the lower side of the slide member 450 (for example, the left and right of the lower member 460). It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball flowing down the path 463 appears to overlap in the direction of the player's line of sight (the line of sight looking down at the winning unit 400 diagonally downward from the front side).

The pair of tip portions 451 are formed symmetrically with the central flow path 431 in between, and are arranged at symmetrical positions with the central flow path 431 in between, so that the pair of left and right ends face inward left and right at the same angle with respect to the horizontal. It is formed in a plate shape with a downward inclination and a pair of left and right sides inclined downward at the same angle toward the rear side.

The left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are extended rearward while following the inclination of the tip portion 451. The extension length of the left guide plate portion 452 is larger than that of the right guide plate portion 453. long. Therefore, the vertical position at the rear end portion of the left guide plate portion 452 is lower than that of the right guide plate portion 453.

The left guide plate portion 452 includes an inclined surface portion 452a formed so as to increase the degree of downward inclination toward the right of the upper surface of the plate near the right edge portion of the rear side substantially half portion. Further, the right guide plate portion 453 includes an inclined surface portion 453a formed so as to increase the degree of downward inclination toward the left of the upper surface of the plate near the left edge portion of the rear side substantially half portion.

The inclined surface portions 452a and 453a are formed with a front-rear width sufficient for the slide member 450 to be arranged to face the gaps 432a and 433a in the left-right direction regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in the non-excited state or the excited state.

That is, at the timing when the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 passes through the gaps 432a and 433a, the sphere is moved along the inclination of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in the non-excited state or the excited state. Since it can be flowed, the flow direction can be moved inward to the left and right.

Since the extension length of the right guide plate portion 453 is shortened, it is possible to secure a space behind the right guide plate portion 453. In the present embodiment, by disposing the solenoid SOL41 for driving the electric accessory 640a in the vacant space, the winning unit 400 is configured so that the solenoid SOL41 fits well (in a shape that becomes substantially square when viewed from above). be able to.

The formation width (left-right width) of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be configured so as to project to the upper side of the bottom surface portion 431a of the central flow path 431 so as to partially overlap in top view. In this case, the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

11 and 13 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit 400. In FIGS. 11 to 14, the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a is shown, and the members below the middle member 430 are also shown in an exploded manner. Further, FIGS. 11 and 12 show a state in which the winning unit 400 is visually recognized from diagonally above, and FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the winning unit 400 is visually recognized from diagonally below.

The winning unit 400 is electrically supported by the lower member 460, which is arranged below the middle member 430 and fastened and fixed to the middle member 430, and is supported by the lower member 460 so as to be tilted back and forth between the middle member 430 and the lower member 460. It includes a tilting member 470 that constitutes the accessory 640a, and a transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 to the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14, the configuration of the plate member 410, the front design member 420, the middle member 430, the upper member 440, and the slide member 450 of the winning unit 400 will be additionally described.

The front design member 420 includes a ball guide ridge 428 formed as a pair of ridges that guide the flow of the ball at a position slightly offset from the left and right intermediate positions of the pair of partition plates 423 to the left and right outside.

Since the protruding tip (rear end) of the ball guide ridge 428 is shaped to incline downward toward the front side, a downward load is applied to the ball when the ball arriving from the rear side is guided. It can be easily given, and it is possible to easily prevent the ball from bouncing back.

The ball guide ridge 428 is formed along the flow path of the ball that has passed through the central opening 413 of the plate member 410 to the front side, and functions as a portion that comes into contact with the flowing ball. The ball guide ridge 428 is formed of a pair of ridges that are offset to the left and right outside from the left and right centers of the flowing sphere. As a result, the ball can be easily brought into contact with the left and right inner corners of the ball guide ridge 428, so that the ball guide ridge 428 can be worn from the corners. As a result, damage to the left and right central portions of the ball guide ridge 428 can be suppressed.

As a result, even if the rear side surface of the front plate portion 421 is worn and worn due to rubbing against the ball after long-term use, the ball and the front plate can be worn from the tip of the ball guide ridge 428. The contact area with the rear side surface of the portion 421 can be kept small.

Further, since the front design member 420 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the degree of transmission is reduced by scratches regardless of whether it occurs on the front side or the back side. In other words, the larger the area where scratches occur, the more difficult it is to visually recognize the member arranged behind the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In the present embodiment, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transmission of the front design member 420 in order to ensure the visibility of the sphere flowing down the back surface side of the front design member 420.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the location where the scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge 428, the scratches generated on the front design member 420 can be minimized, and the visibility of the flowing ball can be improved. Can be secured.

The middle member 430 is a support extension portion 436 that extends to the left and right outside of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 to hold and support the detection sensor 435 from above, and a plate-shaped member on which the detection sensor 435 is placed. A base plate 437 to which the extension portion 436 is fastened and fixed at the left and right ends is provided.

On the opposite surface side (lower surface side) of the bottom surface portion 431a arranged between the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433, the locking plate portion 431b protrudes vertically downward from the position closer to the rear end side in a plate shape. Will be set up. The locking plate portion 431b functions as a portion that defines the moving end of the slide member 450, the details of which will be described later.

The support extension portion 436 has an opening 436a whose upper side surface is formed as a smooth surface along the front-rear direction and which opens above the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and is formed in a rectangular shape through which a sphere can pass, and an upper side surface. A ridge portion 436b, which is formed so as to project upward in a manner extending in the left-right direction, is provided.

The ridge portion 436b is arranged at a position where the front side surface smoothly communicates with the edge portion of the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 in the assembled state (see FIG. 9) of the middle stage member 430. As a result, in the excited state of the slide member 450 (see FIG. 9), a ball flowing downward on the front side of the tip portion 451 enters the gap between the tip portion 451 and the detection sensor 435, and the flow is unintentionally delayed. It can be avoided. That is, the ridge portion 436b can guide the flow of the sphere, and the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

Further, the ridge portion 436b is arranged directly below the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 in the non-excited state (see FIG. 7) of the slide member 450. Therefore, when a ball rides on the tip portion 451 even if the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 are bent and deformed in the direction of tilting forward due to the weight of the ball. Since the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 can be supported from below by the ridge portion 436b, the bending deformation can be suppressed.

The base plate 437 is formed with an opening in some places by being bored in the vertical direction. That is, an opening larger than the opening of the detection sensor 435 is bored in the protruding portion 437a which is formed so as to project forward in order to dispose the detection sensor 435 so as not to block the opening of the detection sensor 435. At the end, an opening 437b for penetrating the plunger SOL41a of the solenoid SOL41 is formed in the lower portion of the solenoid SOL41 to be fitted and supported, and at the central rear end, it penetrates the second member 485 of the transmission member 480. An opening 437c having a width sufficient in the front-rear direction is formed to allow displacement.

The base plate 437 has a receiving recess 437d extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits a driving force to the tilting member 470 on the lower side surface, and a sphere guided by the lower member 460. An inclined surface portion 437e that constitutes the ceiling of the route and inclines downward toward the rear, and an inclination that inclines downward toward the rear at the front end portion of a pair of extending walls extending downward from the left and right ends of the inclined surface portion 437e. It is provided with a stopper 437f.

The tilt stopper 437f can block the path of the sphere while setting the posture of the tilt member 470 in the non-excited state to a posture slightly tilted from the posture of standing directly above, so that the opening / closing angle of the tilt member 470 can be adjusted. It can be kept small. As a result, the time required for the opening / closing operation of the tilting member 470 can be shortened, so that the occurrence of ball biting can be suppressed, but the details will be described later.

The ceiling component 444 of the upper member 440 is an inclined surface portion 444a that is vertically opposed to the bottom surface portion 431a of the middle member 430 and is inclined upward toward the front, and a portion arranged on both left and right sides of the inclined surface portion 444a. A pair of extending portions 444b extending downward from the rear end portion having an L-shaped cross section are provided.

The inclined surface portion 444a constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow path 431, and since the inclined surface portion 444a is inclined upward as it goes forward, the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow path 431 increases as it goes forward. growing. That is, since the flow path area increases toward the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the flow mode in which the central flow path 431 flows forward.

The extension portion 444b is designed so that when the upper member 440 is assembled to the middle member 430, the left and right inner ends of the rear end can be aligned with the alignment portions 432b and 433b of the middle member 430. There is.

By assembling in this way, the front-rear position of the rear side surface of the extension portion 444b coincides with the front-rear position of the rear end portions (front ends of the gaps 432a and 433a) of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433. That is, the extension portion 444b is provided with a gap 444c between the left side wall portion 445 and the right side wall portion 446 which are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction, and the gap 444c is arranged directly above the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured to be continuously connected to the gaps 432a and 433a.

In other words, the lower portion of the opening through which the sphere passes is formed by the gaps 432a and 433a, and the upper portion of the opening in which the gaps 432a and 433a form the lower portion is formed by the gap 444c. As a result, the upper portions of the gaps 432a and 433a are opened, and when the ball bounces, the ball passes through a position outside the gaps 432a, 433a and 444c, unlike the case where the ball can jump over the gaps 432a and 433a and flow down. It can be prevented from doing so.

The slide member 450 includes a pair of ridge portions 455 formed so as to project downward from the lower side surface of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 in a manner extending in the front-rear direction. The ridge portion 455 is designed so that the left-right width is narrower than the left-right width of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, and the protrusion end portion (lower end portion) is in the moving direction (front-back direction) of the slide member 450. It is shaped to fit.

When the slide member 450 moves back and forth, the ridge portion 455 is supported by the support extension portion 436 of the middle stage member 430. In this case, the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension portion 436 can be suppressed. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide member 450 can be suppressed, and the forward tilt displacement (deformation) due to the weight of the ball on which the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 rest on the upper surface can be suppressed.

The ridge portion 455 is formed along the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, and functions as a rib to increase the rigidity of the long left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 in the front-rear direction. Can be enhanced.

The ridge portion 455 is arranged behind the tip portion 451. In other words, the ridge portion 455 is not formed on the lower side surface of the tip portion 451 and does not increase the rigidity of the tip portion 451.

Thereby, the ease of elastic deformation of the slide member 450 can be changed for each part. That is, the tip portion 451 is configured to allow a certain degree of elastic deformation, so that, for example, when the slide member 450 moves forward, a ball bites between the front end portion of the slide member 450 and the front design member 420. Even if it is caught, the biting of the ball can be eliminated at an early stage due to the load generated by the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the tip portion 451.

When the tip portion 451 is elastically deformed and even the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are elastically deformed, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 have a long shape in the front-rear direction. Also, there is a possibility that the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 may be narrowed.

In this case, the flow resistance of the ball that has already passed through the ball passage opening 414 and rolls on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 increases, and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. It can be a factor that the time for the sphere to pass through the upper surface of the sphere becomes longer than usual.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are formed with a ridge portion 455, and the ridge portion 455 functions as a rib to form the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. It is possible to prevent the right guide plate portion 453 from being elastically deformed. As a result, the size of the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the sphere flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 can be maintained, and the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 can be maintained. It is possible to easily manage the time when the ball passes.

Therefore, both the effect that the tip portion 451 is easily elastically deformed and the effect that the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are not easily elastically deformed can be exhibited at the same time.

Next, the configuration of the winning unit 400 other than the plate member 410, the front design member 420, the middle member 430, the upper member 440, and the slide member 450 will be described.

The lower member 460 constitutes a plurality of rolling paths of the sphere. That is, the lower member 460 includes a central path 461 for rolling the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, and a left and right path 463 for rolling the ball that has passed through the detection sensor 435. The ball that has rolled on the central path 461 is detected by the detection sensor 462 disposed behind it.

The detection sensor 462 detects the passage of the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor 462, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

Further, the lower member 460 receives the bearing portion 464 constituting the lower half portion of the receiving portion that pivotally supports the tilting member 470 and the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member 470. A receiving recess 465 extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for this purpose, and a bearing portion 466 forming a lower half portion of the receiving portion that pivotally supports the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the slide member 450. , Equipped with.

The bearing portion 464 is configured as a recess whose upper portion is opened, and the middle stage member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower stage member 460 in a state where the supported protrusion 473 of the tilting member 470 is arranged, so that the bearing portion 464 and the middle stage are fixed. The tilting member 470 is pivotally supported by the member 430 so as to be tiltable.

The receiving recess 465 is a central path as a region that is sufficiently long in the front-rear direction to receive the first member 481 that is long in the front-rear direction and has a depth sufficient to allow the vertical displacement of the first member 481. It is formed at a position between 461 and the left-right path 463. By preventing the first member 481 from falling off from the receiving recess 465, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the first member 481 in the left-right direction.

The bearing portion 466 is configured as a recess whose upper portion is opened, and the middle stage member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower stage member 460 in a state where the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 is arranged, whereby the bearing portion 466 and the middle stage member are fastened and fixed. The second member 485 is tiltably supported by the 430.

In the non-excited state, the tilting member 470 rises as shown in FIG. 11 and is in a posture to restrict entry into the central path 461 side, while in the excited state, the tilting member 470 tilts and displaces (see FIG. 9) and is located on the central path 461 side. It is considered to be a posture that allows the ball to enter.

The tilting member 470 includes a plate-shaped portion 471 that gently curves inward (upward) toward the tip, and a pair of cylindrical portions 472 that project in a cylindrical shape in the left-right direction at the lower end of the plate-shaped portion 471. And the supported protrusion 473 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the cylinder 472 in a cylindrical shape that is coaxial with the cylinder 472 and has a smaller diameter than the cylinder 472, and from the outer periphery of the right cylinder 472 in a side view. It is provided with a transmitted portion 474 which is extended in a C shape and abuts on the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 to receive load transmission.

The plate-shaped portion 471 is formed with a left-right width of about the diameter of a sphere, and is configured to prevent a plurality of spheres from landing at the same time.

The columnar portion 472 is a portion rotatably supported by the lower member 460, similarly to the supported protrusion 473. Since the columnar portion 472 is configured, it is possible to secure an area that bears the sliding load during rotation and the load in the gravity direction generated by the load from the sphere, so that it is pivotally supported only by the supported protrusion 473. Compared with the case, mechanical wear can be suppressed.

The transmission member 480 is a first member 481 configured to be restricted from falling off in the vertical direction by inserting the plunger SOL41a in the left-right direction at the rear end portion, and a second member interlocking with the first member 481. 485 and.

The movement of the plunger SOL41a in the front-back and left-right directions except in the vertical direction is restricted by the opening 437b of the base plate 437, and the first member 481 into which the plunger SOL41a is inserted in the left-right direction is moved in the left-right direction by the receiving recess 465. Since the movement of the first member 481 is restricted, it is possible to easily prevent the first member 481 and the plunger SOL41a from being disconnected due to falling off in the left-right direction.

When the excitation state of the solenoid SOL41 is switched and the plunger SOL41a is displaced in the vertical direction, the first member 481 is displaced in the vertical direction and the second member 485 is displaced in the direction of tilting back and forth. It will be described later.

15 (a) is a front view of the winning unit 400, FIG. 15 (b) is a side view of the winning unit 400 in the direction of arrow XVb of FIG. 15 (a), and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the winning unit 400. It is a top view of the winning unit 400 in the direction view of arrow XVc of FIG. 15A.

15 (a) to 15 (c) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in FIGS. 15B and 15C, the positions of the front and rear side surfaces of the base plate 60 to which the winning unit 400 is assembled are illustrated by imaginary lines. In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the front side of the front side surface of the base plate 60 reaches the winning unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is arranged on the left and right outside of the eaves portion 426, and the tip portion 451 is the tip portion 451 of FIG. 15 (b). As shown in, it slopes downward toward the rear.

Therefore, the ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 deviates from the ball receiving portion 412 and rides on the tip portion 451 via the eaves portion 426 or directly on the tip portion 451 without passing through the eaves portion 426. The ball (dive ball) is moved backward along the inclination of the tip portion 451. Then, when the ball reaches a position where it can pass through the ball passage opening 414 (see FIG. 11), the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate is transmitted along the upper surface of the slide member 450 along the inclination of the tip portion 451. It flows to the part 453 side.

16 (a) and 16 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG. 15 (c). FIG. 16A shows the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470), and FIG. 16B shows the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a part of the nail KG1 to be planted on the base plate 60 is shown.

The switching of the state of the slide member 450 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, and is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish between the non-excited state and the excited state when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult to predict whether the game ball flowing down toward the slide member 450 rolls on the upper surface of the slide member 450 or flows downward on the front side of the tip portion 451.

The switching of the state of the tilting member 470 is a tilting operation, and is configured so that the difference between the non-excited state and the excited state can be easily discriminated. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball can enter the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2).

With reference to FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), a flow mode of the ball reaching the winning unit 400 will be described. Since the winning unit 400 is formed in a symmetrical shape in the cross sections shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the description on one side is limited to the left and right, and the description on the other side is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball that flows down the ball receiving portion 412 flows down along the path DR1 that flows through, for example, the eaves portion 426. In this case, the ball does not flow down at the shortest distance to the ball passing opening 414 because it is blocked by the eaves 426, and the staying time on the tip 451 is extended. Further, since the eaves 426 has a velocity component to the left and right outside and flows down, the ball after landing on the slide member 450 and bouncing is likely to bounce toward the left and right outside.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper surface of the slide member 450 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, the direction of the bounce of the sphere can be moved to the left and right inward. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flowing down in the path DR1 spills to the left and right outside of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450.

Further, in the present embodiment, the nail KG1 is planted at a position facing the sphere flowing toward the left and right outside of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450. Therefore, even when the ball flows toward the left and right outside of the tip portion 451, the ball having a larger momentum can be made easier to return to the slide member 450 side due to the collision with the nail KG1. When a ball flows toward the left and right outside of the tip portion 451 and the momentum of the ball is insufficient, it does not bounce even when it collides with the nail KG1, and the nail KG1 and the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 The ball will flow down between them.

Even when flowing down on a route different from the route DR1, due to the influence of the arrangement of the nail KG1, the route DR1 usually reaches the same point DR1a as the point where the slide member 450 reaches, and is guided to the slide member 450.

The tip 451 of the slide member 450 is on the nail KG1 side of the ball that flows down over the nail KG1 planted in a position facing the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and reaches the point DR1a. Since it is formed so as to overhang, it is prevented from falling off between the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 and the nail KG1.

The ball bounced off by the nail KG1 may fly toward the left and right inner portions of the tip portion 451 (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414), but the eaves portion so that the ball and the eaves portion 426 easily collide with each other. The arrangement of 426 is designed. That is, in the present embodiment, even in an irregular flow mode in which the ball is bounced off by the nail KG1, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the front position of the ball passage opening 414 without passing through the point DR1a is suppressed. ing. In this embodiment, the frequency of balls that are bounced off by the nail KG1 and reach the front position of the ball passage opening 414 without passing through the point DR1a is about 1 in 10 of the balls that are bounced off by the nail KG1. It is designed to be adjusted so that it becomes.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball flows down in the path DR1 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470), the ball does not land on the slide member 450 and the eaves portion. It flows while maintaining the velocity component in the left-right direction generated by the inclination of 426.

Since there is no allowance for the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 to extend to the left and right outside, the action of narrowing the gap between the slide member 450 and the nail KG1 cannot be expected, and the ball deviates to the left and right outside of the opening 436a and flows down. To do. Further, from the design of the eaves 426 described above, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the front position of the ball passage opening 414 is suppressed in an irregular flow mode due to the ball being bounced off by the nail KG1. Is suppressed from passing through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

That is, when the sphere flows down as illustrated in the path DR1, the sphere is likely to be guided inward on the upper surface of the tip portion 451 if the slide member 450 is in the non-excited state, and if the slide member 450 is in the excited state. It is unlikely that the ball will directly enter the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and it will easily flow down the left and right outside of the front design member 420.

Next, the flow-down mode of the sphere after riding on the tip portion 451 of the non-excited slide member 450 will be described. When a ball riding on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 flows inward to the left and right along the inclination of the tip portion 451 and the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state until it passes through the ball passage opening 414. , The ball flows to the rear side of the tip portion 451 without any problem, and the possibility of entering the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2) increases.

As another case, the case where the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is on the tip portion 451 will be described.

The sphere arrangement B1 in FIG. 16A is shown as being on the left and right outer ends of the slide member 450. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a sphere in the sphere arrangement B1, the rear of the sphere is blocked by the plate member 410, so that the sphere does not move backward with the movement of the slide member 450. The sphere cannot flow down the left and right outside of the front design member 420.

The sphere arrangement B2 in FIG. 16B is illustrated as a state in which the center of the sphere is arranged above the left and right outer edges of the opening 436a of the middle member 430. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a sphere in the sphere arrangement B2, the rear of the sphere is blocked by the plate member 410, so that the sphere does not move backward with the movement of the slide member 450. Can not.

On the other hand, whether to flow down the left and right outer sides of the front design member 420 or to the opening 436a side changes depending on the momentum of the sphere at that time and the bias of the center position of the sphere. The ball that has flowed down to the opening 436a side passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and the prize ball is paid out to the player.

Therefore, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when the ball is in the ball arrangement B2, the whereabouts of the ball are uncertain, and the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the whereabouts of the ball. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide member 450 when the ball is in the arrangement B2.

The ball arrangement B3 in FIG. 16B is illustrated as a state in which the ball is arranged in front of the ball passage opening 414. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement B3, the rear of the ball is opened by the ball passing opening 414, so that the ball receives from the slide member 450 as the slide member 450 moves. It moves backward due to the load (it moves backward while being pushed by the slide member 450).

That is, even if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when the ball is arranged in the ball arrangement B3, the ball (only one) can flow down to the rear of the ball passing opening 414. In this case, since the upper side surface of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is inclined downward toward the rear, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from spilling to the front side during the movement of the slide member 450.

According to the present embodiment, since the sphere arrangement B3 is formed symmetrically, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the sphere is on both the left and right sphere arrangements B3, the sphere is changed. Both of them move backward with the movement of the slide member and flow down to the rear of the ball passage opening 414.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even in the same state change in which the slide member 450 is switched from the state where the ball is on the tip portion 451 to the excitation state, it depends on the arrangement of the ball on the tip portion 451. Therefore, the flow path of the sphere is changed after the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state. Therefore, when the ball is on the tip portion 451 it is possible to improve the attention to the movement mode of the ball and the slide member 450.

Then, as the ball arrangements B1 to B3 when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state move toward the downstream side (ball arrangement B3 side), the profit that the player may obtain increases. Therefore, even after the ball rides on the slide member 450, the profit that the player may obtain will continue to increase, so that the attention to the flow of the ball can be improved.

Further, the number of spheres on the slide member 450 is not limited to one, and for example, spheres may be arranged at the same time in the sphere arrangement B1 and the sphere arrangement B3. In this case, the slide member 450 moves until the ball of the ball arrangement B3 passes rearward through the ball passage opening 414 and the ball of the ball arrangement B1 reaches the ball arrangement B3 side (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). Since the potential gain of the player is higher when the ball and the slide member 450 are maintained in the non-excited state, the attention to the movement of the ball and the slide member 450 can be improved.

FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 on the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 15 (c), and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. 15 (c). Is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 15 (c). 17 to 19 show a non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a.

In the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a, the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position and the tilt member 470 is arranged in the closed position as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19.

First, the configuration of the flow path of the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the slide member 450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19. When the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position, the front-rear width between the front design member 420 and the slide member 450 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, so that the inflow of the sphere into the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 is prevented. Therefore, the ball on the tip portion 451 is introduced behind the ball passage opening 414.

The ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls on the slide member 450 along the region surrounded by the middle member 430 and the upper member 440. The upper member 440 includes a ceiling surface 447 arranged to face the upper surface of the slide member 450.

The ceiling surface 447 is formed as a flat surface extending along the front-rear direction (in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide member 450), unlike the inclination of the upper surface of the slide member 450. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the flow path formed between the ceiling surface 447 and the slide member 450 above and below becomes larger toward the rear side (downstream side), so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed or the ball can be suppressed. It is possible to avoid an increase in flow resistance.

Further, as a result, even when the ball that rolls backward on the slide member 450 bounces upward, or when the ball is pushed backward and bounces backward, the ball bounces on the ceiling surface. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a collision with 447 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 19, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 is lower than the vertical position of the ceiling surface 447. Therefore, even when the ball bounces close to the ceiling surface 447, the height position of the ball can be dropped to the inclined surface portion 444a before the ball joins the central flow path 431 through the gap 444c.

That is, it is possible to reduce the momentum of the sphere and then join the central flow path 431. As a result, even if a sphere is introduced into the central flow path 431 from the left and right at an arbitrary timing and can collide, the sphere newly guided by the central flow path 431 is already arranged in the central flow path 431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a large load is applied to the existing sphere so as to cause the sphere to flow backward. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the backflow of the sphere in the central flow path 431 and smooth (smooth) the sphere flow.

Since the height position of the ceiling surface 447 is the same on the left and right, this action is the same not only for the sphere guided by the right guide plate portion 453 but also for the sphere guided by the left guide plate portion 452. Occurs in.

The ceiling surface 447 includes a curved guide portion 447a formed as a curved surface at the rear end portion and smoothly connected to the left side wall portion 445 and the right side wall portion 446. When the sphere bounces on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and collides with the curved guide portion 447a, the flow direction of the sphere can be directed downward along the shape of the curved guide portion 447a, so that the sphere is brought closer to the slide member 450 side. Can be done.

As a result, the sphere can be smoothly displaced below the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a, so that the sphere can be smoothly merged into the central flow path 431.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 19, the width of movement of the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 in the front-rear direction is several centimeters (about 3 to 5 centimeters), but on the front side of the base plate 60. The occupied length (horizontal width) is suppressed to about 1 to 2 cm on one side of the left and right (see FIG. 16).

That is, the slide member 450 is configured so that the range (area occupied in front view) in which the slide member 450 is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 can be made smaller than the path length for guiding the sphere. Will be done. As a result, the space of the game area occupied by the slide member 450 can be reduced while ensuring a sufficient length for guiding the ball with the slide member 450, so that other electric accessories, winning openings, etc. are arranged. Space to play can be secured in the game area.

As shown in FIG. 19, the inclined surface portion 444a of the upper member 440 and the right guide plate portion 453 (and the left guide plate portion 452, see FIG. 17) of the slide member 450 have the same inclination angle in the front-rear direction. There is. As a result, the right opening RT (the opening divided into the right gap 444c, the inclined surface portion 444a and the right guide plate portion 453) through which the ball passes from the right guide plate portion 453 to the central flow path 431, and the left guide plate portion. The area with the left opening LT (the opening partitioned by the left gap 444c, the inclined surface portion 444a, and the left guide plate portion 452) through which the ball passes from the 452 to the central flow path 431 is secured to be the same.

That is, since the left and right openings LT and RT have different front-rear positions, the area (vertical width) of the openings LT and RT becomes smaller in the rear left opening LT because the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a is lower. Although there is a possibility, in the present embodiment, the vertical position of the right guide plate portion 453 (and the left guide plate portion 452, see FIG. 17) of the slide member 450 corresponds to the lower vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a. Similarly, since it is lowered, the vertical widths of the left and right openings LT and RT can be secured to be the same.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the flow resistance when the ball joins the central flow path 431 changes depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453 or the left guide plate portion 452. It can be made easier.

On the other hand, the front-back length of the ball rolling on the slide member 450 differs depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453 or the left guide plate portion 452 (of the left guide plate portion 452). The length of the ball is about 11 mm (diameter of the ball) or more longer than that of the right guide plate 453), so the time required for the ball to join the central flow path 431 after passing through the ball passage opening 414 is different. The details of the time required for the flow of the sphere will be described later.

In addition, in FIGS. 17 to 19, the left and right opening LTs and RTs are illustrated by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is arranged at the forward position. Further, although it is shown slightly smaller to avoid overlapping with other solid lines, it is not intended to be limited to a small shape, and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 smoothly guides the central flow path 431. It is formed in a size and arrangement sufficient to be used.

Next, the central flow path 431 will be described with reference to FIG. The sphere guided by the slide member 450 is introduced into the central flow path 431 along the inclination of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a at the openings LT and RT whose positions are different in the front and rear on both the left and right sides.

The introduced ball flows down toward the front side along the central flow path 431, and when the tilting member 470 is in the closed position, it flows down after colliding with the ball guide ridge 428 and wins a prize. It drops out of the unit 400 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

Here, since the balls received by the ball receiving portion 412 flow down in order to the upper flow path constituent portion 441, the number of balls does not suddenly increase, and the inclination of the upper lid member 443 is the upper flow path constituent portion. It is parallel to 441. On the other hand, a plurality of spheres are arranged in the central flow path 431 at the same time, such as the spheres being guided to the central flow path 431 from the left and right at the same time, and the spheres are connected or lifted due to the load generated between the spheres. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface portion 444a constituting the ceiling portion of the central flow path 431 is inclined upward toward the front, the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow path 431 is forward. It gets bigger as you go. That is, since the flow path area increases toward the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the flow mode in which the central flow path 431 flows forward. That is, even if the flow path configuration is such that the spheres merge at an intermediate position, it is possible to avoid an increase in the flow resistance of the spheres because a large flow path area is secured.

20 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 on the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 15 (c), and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. 15 (c). Is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 15 (c). 20 to 22 show an excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a.

In FIGS. 20 to 22, the left and right openings LT and RT are illustrated by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19. Will be done.

In the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a, the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position and the tilting member 470 is arranged in the open position as shown in FIGS. 20 to 22.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position, the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is arranged behind the front side surface of the plate member 410. This makes it possible to prevent a new ball from landing on the slide member 450.

That is, a new ball is introduced toward the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the downstream side of the central flow path 431 arranged on the downstream side of the slide member 450. Absent. Therefore, if the excited state is maintained beyond the time required for the ball on the slide member 450 to flow completely on the front side of the tilting member 470, all the balls guided to the winning unit 400 are picked up by the tilting member 470. Can be In addition, since the balls guided to the slide member 450 are not added, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b from becoming excessive. The details of the ball entry control will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a narrow ridge portion 455 is formed on the lower surface of the slide member 450, and the narrow ridge portion 445 supports the support extension portion 436 of the middle member 430. Has been done. As a result, the posture change in which the slide member 450 tilts in the front-rear direction is suppressed, and the frictional resistance is reduced by reducing the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension portion 436 when the slide member 450 moves back and forth. be able to.

When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state and the ball is on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 Since the upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear, ball sliding is suppressed, and the ball slides integrally with the slide member 450 (with the same displacement amount as the displacement amount of the slide member 450). In addition, the load applied via the slide member 450 accelerates the sphere backwards.

On the other hand, when the slide member 450 is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state and the ball is on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when the slide member 450 is displaced from the backward position to the forward position, the upper surface of the slide member 450 Due to the relationship with the inclination of, the vertical height of the slide member 450 at the front-rear position where the sphere is arranged is lowered, and the vertical distance between the slide member 450 and the sphere is widened.

That is, the ball will land on the slide member 450 again through the floating state with respect to the slide member 450, and the ball is prevented from moving forward integrally with the slide member 450.

In addition, if the sphere is spun in the forward rotation direction at the start of displacement of the slide member 450 (before the vertical distance between the sphere and the slide member 450 is established), the flow velocity of the sphere on the slide member 450 is increased. Can be made to.

When the slide member 450 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the ball already on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 remains on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 as it is. The branch of the flow path is confirmed on the downstream side.

On the other hand, when the slide member 450 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the ball arranged in front of the ball passing opening 414 may fall toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. As described above. That is, at a position in front of the ball passage opening 414, it is possible to determine the branching of the ball flow path, that is, whether the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and is discharged out of the game area or flows in another flow path. There is sex.

In the present embodiment, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 is configured to be located on the front side of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. As a result, the attention to the detection sensor 435 can be improved, the flow path branches to the opening 435a side of the detection sensor 435, and the sphere passing through the opening 435a can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 21, the inclined surface portion 452a is arranged in the left opening LT even when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position. That is, the inclined surface portion 452a is formed with a front-rear width sufficient to be arranged in the left opening LT regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 450. The same applies to the inclined surface portion 453a.

If the tilting member 470 is still in the open position when the sphere introduced into the central flow path 431 passes through the central flow path 431, the sphere is picked up by the tilting member 470 and passes through the detection sensor 462.

That is, the position in front of the tilting member 470 is a position where the branch of the flow path of the ball is determined, whether the ball passes through the detection sensor 462 and is discharged out of the game area or flows in another flow path. ..

In the present embodiment, the tilting member 470 is configured to be located on the front side of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. As a result, the attention to the tilting member 470 can be improved, the flow path branches to the detection sensor 462 side, and the ball flowing down to the detection sensor 462 side can be easily visually recognized.

As described above, the winning unit 400 is configured to arrange the position where the branch of the flow path of the sphere is determined on the front side. Further, the ball does not pass through a plurality of positions (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) at which the branch of the flow path of the ball is determined, but is sufficient. By configuring the ball to pass at intervals, the player who pays attention to the ball can have a margin to move his / her line of sight.

In addition, by narrowing the distance in front view between a plurality of positions (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) at which the branch of the flow path of the ball is determined (see FIG. 16). , The player who pays attention to the ball can make room to move his eyes.

As shown in FIG. 21, the supported protrusion 473 as the rotation axis of the tilting member 470 is arranged at a position recessed rearward from the front end portion of the central flow path 431. In addition, the tilting member 470 in the closed position is slightly tilted forward in response to the tilting of the tilting stopper 437f of the middle member 430 (see FIG. 18).

As a result, even if the tilting member 470 is excited and displaced toward the open position when the flowing ball is arranged in front of the tilting member 470 in the closed position, the front surface of the tilting member 470 is already forward. Since it is inclined toward the ball, it is easy to apply a downward load to the ball, and the ball can be discharged downward at an early stage. That is, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is sandwiched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 and the displacement of the tilting member 470 to the open position is hindered for a long time.

Further, since the rotation angle in the opening / closing operation of the tilting member 470 can be reduced, the time required for the opening / closing operation can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the opening / closing timing and to prevent over-entry balls.

In the present embodiment, the left-right width of the plate-shaped portion 471 of the tilting member 470 is formed to be about the diameter of a sphere (see FIG. 16), and it is not possible to pick up a plurality of spheres while shifting from the open position to the closed position. Since it is configured so that it cannot be prevented, it is possible to easily prevent an over-entry ball.

The inclined surface portion 437e constituting the ceiling portion of the flow path through which the ball picked up by the tilting member 470 flows down is formed as an inclined surface portion parallel to the central path 461 on the rear side portion, and is a front side portion as a side close to the tilting member 470. In, the angle of the ascending inclination toward the front is increased.

As a result, even when a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 bounces due to a collision with the tilting member 470, the ball can be smoothly introduced into the path between the central path 461 and the tilted surface portion 437e. .. Therefore, the tilting member 470 is closed because the weight of the sphere on the tilting member 470 and the inflow resistance of the sphere into the path between the central path 461 and the inclined surface portion 437e are high to prevent the sphere from being displaced. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the displacement toward the position is delayed.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state, the vertical position of the slide member 450 at the same front-rear position rises, so that the lower edge of the right opening RT rises and the area through which the ball can pass. Becomes smaller. The same applies to the left opening LT.

At this time, the sphere that has reached the rear end of the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 jumps up due to the effect of raising the vertical position of the slide member 450 at that position. This can increase the kinetic energy of the sphere.

On the other hand, the vertical distance between the inclined surface portion 444a and the slide member 450 is narrower than that in the state where the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position, so that the flow resistance of the ball is increased and the momentum of the ball is reduced by the inclined surface portion 444a. The action is enhanced. As a result, the sphere can be guided to the central flow path 431 after the momentum (kinetic energy) of the sphere is sufficiently reduced.

23 (a) and 23 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 in line XXIIIa-XXIIIa of FIG. 15 (c). FIG. 23 (a) shows the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470), and FIG. 23 (b) shows the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. In addition, in FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B, the cross section passing through the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the gap 444c is shown.

In the present embodiment, since the left opening LT and the right opening RT are misaligned in the front-rear direction, the openings are often seen when the left and right openings are arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid the problem that the spheres passing through the sphere collide with each other in the left-right direction, and the loads generated by the spheres are balanced toward the outside in the left-right direction, and the flow of the spheres is delayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sphere on the left guide plate portion 452 passes through the right opening RT arranged on the front side of the left opening LT introduced into the central flow path 431, and the sphere on the right guide plate portion 453. Is configured to be introduced into the central flow path 431, so that a sphere trying to pass through the right opening RT may collide with a sphere flowing down the central flow path 431 (FIG. 23 (a). )reference). In this case, even if the shape of the flow path is designed so as not to be so, there is a possibility that the loads applied to each other by the spheres are balanced and the flow of the spheres is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state and displaced to the retracted position, it does not affect the vertical position of the sphere flowing down the central flow path 431, while the right guide plate portion. By raising the vertical position of the ball on the 453, it is possible to leave a momentary gap between the ball arranged in the central flow path 431 and the ball on the right guide plate 453. it can. During this period, the spheres arranged in the central flow path 431 flow along the inclination of the central flow path 431, so that the balance of the loads applied to each other by the spheres can be lost.

Further, when the slide member 450 is switched to the non-excited state and displaced to the forward position, the vertical position of the right guide plate portion 453 is lowered while the vertical position of the sphere flowing down the central flow path 431 is not affected. By doing so, it is possible to leave a gap (float) between the ball above the right guide plate portion 453 and the right guide plate portion 453 for a moment. When the sphere above the right guide plate portion 453 is displaced downward so as to fill this gap, it is considered that the sphere is pushed by the load from the sphere arranged in the central flow path 431 and displaced outward to the left and right. Therefore, the balance of the loads that the spheres give each other can be lost.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the load applied to each other by the spheres is balanced at the confluence position with the central flow path 431, the load is balanced by switching the state of the slide member 450. It is configured so that the arrangement of one of the spheres can be changed and the load balance can be lost. As a result, the flow of the sphere from the slide member 450 to the central flow path 431 can be kept smooth.

Since the above-mentioned action of disturbing the load balance occurs at the timing when the state of the slide member 450 is switched, the operation pattern of the slide member 450 may be designed in anticipation of this action. That is, the higher the frequency of switching the state of the slide member 450, the easier it is to lose the balance of the loads between the spheres during the flow, so that the flow of the spheres can be smoothed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28, variations of the flow path of the sphere that has reached the position where the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is arranged will be described.

24 (a) to 24 (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. In FIGS. 24A to 24D, the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and the flow of the sphere after riding on the tip portion 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (d), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing sphere, the plate member 410, the front design member 420, and the upper member 440 are not shown, and the flowing sphere is omitted. The place to guide is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the landing of the ball on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is the left and right outer portions (ball arrangement B1, ball arrangement B1) of the tip portion 451 as shown in FIG. 24A. (See FIG. 16A)). The ball landing on the tip portion 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 as shown in FIG. 24 (b) and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 of the upper member 440. To do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24C, the slide member 450 flows into the central flow path 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a, and flows down to the front side along the inclination of the central flow path 431. After that, as shown in FIG. 24D, the sphere that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central flow path 431 flows downward.

As shown in FIGS. 24A to 24D, when the electric accessory 640a is maintained in a non-excited state for the period during which the ball passes through the winning unit 400, the ball landing on the tip portion 451 It falls on the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

25 (a) to 25 (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 25 (a) and 25 (b) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIGS. 25 (c) and 25 (d) show the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. In FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the flow of the sphere after riding on the tip portion 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing sphere, the plate member 410, the front design member 420, and the upper member 440 are not shown, and the flowing sphere is omitted. The place to guide is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the landing of the ball on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is the left and right outer portions (ball arrangement B1, the ball arrangement B1) of the tip portion 451 as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 16A)). The ball that has landed on the tip portion 451 then flows inward to the left and right toward the front side of the ball passage opening 414, and passes through the ball arrangement B2 (see FIG. 16A) as shown in FIG. 25B.

When the flowing sphere is arranged in the sphere arrangement B2 and the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the sphere flows inward to the left and right due to inertia, and FIG. 25 (d) As shown in the above, the sphere flows downward on the front side of the sphere passage opening 414 and passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), when the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state within a short time after the ball gets on the tip portion 451, it is on the tip portion 451. The ball can fall on the front side of the ball passage opening 414 and pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

However, when the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state within an extremely short time so that the inertia does not act on the left and right inward, the sphere on the tip portion 451 deviates from the opening 435a and the detection sensor 435. It can flow down the left and right outside.

26 (a) to 26 (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 26 (a) and 26 (b) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIGS. 26 (c) and 26 (d) show the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. In FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the flow of the sphere after riding on the tip portion 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing sphere, the plate member 410, the front design member 420, and the upper member 440 are not shown, and the flowing sphere is omitted. The place to guide is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the landing of the ball on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is the left and right outer portions (ball arrangement B1, ball arrangement B1) of the tip portion 451 as shown in FIG. 26 (a). (See FIG. 16A)). The ball landing on the tip portion 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 as shown in FIG. 26B and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 of the upper member 440. To do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26C, the slide member 450 flows into the central flow path 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a, and flows down to the front side along the inclination of the central flow path 431. After that, as shown in FIG. 26D, the sphere that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central flow path 431 flows downward, is picked up by the tilting member 470, and flows backward.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state and maintained in the excited state while the ball passes through the winning unit 400, the tip The ball landing on the portion 451 falls on the front side of the central opening 413, is picked up by the tilting member 470, and enters the second winning opening 640 (opening opened and closed by the tilting member 470, see FIG. 2).

27 (a) to 27 (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 27 (a), 27 (b) and 27 (d) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIG. 27 (c) shows the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d), the flow of the sphere after riding on the tip portion 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing sphere, the plate member 410, the front design member 420, and the upper member 440 are not shown, and the flowing sphere is omitted. The place to guide is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 on the left and right outer portions (ball arrangement B1, ball arrangement B1,) of the tip portion 451 as shown in FIG. 27 (a). (See FIG. 16A)). The ball landing on the tip portion 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 as shown in FIG. 27 (b) and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 of the upper member 440. To do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the slide member 450 flows into the central flow path 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a, and flows down to the front side along the inclination of the central flow path 431. At this point, the electric accessory 640a is in the excited state as shown in FIG. 27 (c), as shown in FIG. 26 (c).

After that, the electric accessory 640a is switched to the non-excited state as shown in FIG. 27 (d) before the ball passes through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central flow path 431. After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the sphere that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central flow path 431 flows downward.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d), when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state and then switched to the non-excited state again while the ball passes through the winning unit 400. The ball landing on the tip portion 451 falls on the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state after the ball has passed through the ball passing opening 414, it is unknown whether or not the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470. To.

That is, depending on the mode of state change of the tilting member 470 after the ball passes through the ball passing opening 414, the ball falls on the front side of the tilting member 470 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b, or tilts. It is picked up by the member 470 and flows down toward the second winning opening 640, and it is unknown in which direction the ball flows down until the ball reaches the tilting member 470. As a result, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down toward the front side position of the tilting member 470.

When the ball rides on the tip portion 451 it becomes a turning point of whether or not the ball flows into the ball passage opening 414, which improves attention, and when the ball passes through the central opening 413, the ball tilts. Attention can be improved as a turning point of whether or not the member 470 picks up the ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 at a plurality of positions.

28 (a) and 28 (b) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. In FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the excited state of the electric accessory 640a is shown, and the flow of the sphere flowing down the front side of the tip portion 451 is shown by an arrow. In addition, in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing sphere, the plate member 410, the front design member 420, and the upper member 440 are not shown, and the flowing sphere is omitted. The place to guide is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), when the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position, the path passes through the left and right positions (see sphere arrangement B1, FIG. 16 (a)) landing on the left and right outer portions of the tip portion 451. When the sphere flows down, the sphere flows to the left and right outside of the opening 436a. That is, the sphere does not pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in FIG. 28B, when a sphere having a velocity component inward to the left and right flows down toward the front position of the slide member 450, the sphere enters the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. There is a possibility of doing.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is recessed rearward (see FIG. 20), it is prevented that the ball flowing down so as to jump on the tip portion 451. This preventive action is also enhanced by reducing the opening area surrounded by the ball passage opening 414 and the tip portion 451.

That is, since the tip portion 451 is formed so as to incline downward toward the rear, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position (see FIG. 17), the slide member forming the opening together with the ball passing opening 414. A slide member that can form an opening together with a ball-passing opening 414 when the slide member 450 is placed in a retracted position (see FIG. 20) from the vertical position of the portion 450 (corresponding to the trailing edge of the tip 451). The vertical position of the portion 450 (corresponding to the front edge portion of the tip portion 451) is higher.

Therefore, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position, the vertical position of the lower side (corresponding to the side formed by the tip portion 451) of the opening surrounded by the ball passing opening 414 and the tip portion 451 rises. The opening area is reduced. As a result, when a ball having a velocity component inward to the left and right flows down toward the front position of the slide member 450, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from entering the tip portion 451 side. ..

In this way, the ball flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a generally deviates to the left and right outside of the winning unit 400, and a part of the ball enters the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

On the other hand, since the ball flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 is prevented from riding on the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a, it is moved to the downstream side of the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a new ball is introduced toward the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) or the third winning opening 64b to be arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the winning unit 400 can branch the flow of the ball on the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 at a plurality of positions. First, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state immediately after the ball gets on the tip portion 451 of the non-excited slide member 450 (first branch position), the ball goes to the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. It can flow down toward (see FIG. 25 (c)).

On the other hand, the sphere that did not flow down to the opening 435a flows from the tip portion 451 along the inclination. If the slide member 450 is switched to the excitation state while the ball is on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, the ball remains on the slide member 450. Further, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while riding on the bottom surface portion 431a (see FIG. 26C), the sphere still remains on the bottom surface portion 431a.

The sphere that flows down the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 toward the rear is always left and right due to the inclination in the left-right direction formed over the entire front-rear width of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. While being pulled inward, it flows backward. As a result, the ball can be brought closer to the central flow path 431 on the downstream side before the ball reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. Therefore, the inflow of the ball to the central flow path 431 side is smoother than that the direction is changed to the central flow path 431 side only after the ball reaches the rear end portion of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. can do.

The sphere that has flowed into the central flow path 431 rolls forward along the inclination of the central flow path 431. When the ball falls from the front end of the central flow path 431 (second branch position), if the tilting member 470 of the electric accessory 640a is placed in the closed position in a non-excited state, the ball falls downward. (See FIG. 24 (d)) If the tilting member 470 of the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the open position in the excited state, the sphere is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows backward (see FIG. 26 (d)). ).

In the present embodiment, by setting the flow direction of the game ball that rolls the slide member 450 to include the front-back direction, the game ball can be set to a path length equal to or larger than the dimensions of the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 in the front view. Can be rolled.

As a condition for the development of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the width dimension in the front view of the electric accessory 640a cannot be extended indefinitely, and a length limit is set (for example, 55 mm), but according to the present embodiment. The left-right width dimension of the electric accessory 640a in the front view can further extend the actual rolling length of the ball via the electric accessory 640a while satisfying the conditions for the development of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, in a configuration in which the ball flows over the electric accessory 640a and is guided to the winning opening on the downstream side, the time required for the ball to flow down can be lengthened while narrowing the placement space of the electric accessory 640a in the front view. it can.

Further, as the electric accessory 640a, a portion (tip portion 451 and tilting member 470) that comes into contact with the flowing game ball is provided at a distant position. As a result, the length of the central flow path 431 between them can exceed the shape of the electric accessory 640a to increase the flow length of the game ball.

29 (a) and 29 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 on the XXIXa-XXIXa line of FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position (non-excited state), and FIG. 29 (b) shows the slide member 450 in the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a). The state immediately after being switched to the arranged state (excited state) is shown. Further, in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), a sphere in which a sphere is arranged in the slide member 450 or the central flow path 431 when the slide member 450 slides is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the sphere on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slides moves is displaced backward by the amount of displacement of the slide movement together with the slide member 450. .. Further, since the left guide plate portion 452 constitutes an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the rear (see FIG. 17), a backward load is applied to the sphere, and the sphere is accelerated.

On the other hand, when the slide member 450 slides, the ball on the central flow path 431 rolls on a fixed floor surface without being displaced rearward. Therefore, even when the ball flows down the same path, the ball that was on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slides and moves to the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slides and moves. The time required for the flow is different from that of the ball that is not on the ball and is on the central flow path 431, but the details of the difference in the time required will be described later.

In addition, in FIGS. 29A and 29B, when two spheres are arranged in the flow area formed by the slide member 450 and the central flow path 431, the slide member 450 and the central flow path 431 The state in which one sphere is arranged is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is conceivable that the sphere is arranged only in the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, or the sphere may be arranged only in the central flow path 431. Further, the number of spheres to be arranged is not limited to two, and may be one, or may be three or more.

30 (a) and 30 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 in the XXIXa-XXIXa line of FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 30A shows a state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position (non-excitation state), and FIG. 30B shows the slide member 450 in the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 30A. The state immediately after being switched to the arranged state (excited state) is shown. Further, in FIGS. 30A and 30B, a sphere in which a sphere is arranged in the slide member 450 or the central flow path 431 when the slide member 450 slides is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the sphere that was on the right guide plate 453 when the slide member 450 slid moved was the same as the sphere that was on the left guide plate 452. Together with the slide member 450, it is displaced rearward by the amount of displacement of the slide movement. Further, since the right guide plate portion 453 forms an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the rear (see FIG. 19), a backward load is applied to the sphere, and the sphere is accelerated.

On the other hand, when the slide member 450 slides, the ball on the central flow path 431 rolls on a fixed floor surface without being displaced rearward. Therefore, even when the sphere flows down the same path, the sphere that was on the right guide plate 453 when the slide member 450 slides and the right guide 453 when the slide member 450 slides. The time required for the flow is different from that of the ball that is not on the ball and is on the central flow path 431, but the details of the difference in the time required will be described later.

The time required for the ball to flow down on the slide member 450 and pass through the front end of the central flow path 431 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls down on the right guide plate portion 453 and flows down, it passes through the ball passage opening 414 if the slide member 450 does not slide during the flow of the ball. The sphere passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 in about 2.0 seconds.

On the other hand, when a ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 rolls down on the left guide plate portion 452, the ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 does not slide when the slide member 450 is flowing down. It passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 in about 2.4 seconds.

The slide member 450 constitutes half of the path from passing through the ball passage opening 414 to passing through the front end of the central flow path 431. That is, when a ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 flows down on the right guide plate portion 453, the slide member 450 slides before about 1.0 second has passed since the ball passed through the ball passing opening 414. In that case, the ball receives a load from the slide member 450, while the ball slides when the slide member 450 slides about 1.0 second after the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414. No load is received from the slide member 450.

Further, when a ball passing through the ball passing opening 414 flows down on the left guide plate portion 452, the slide member 450 slides before about 1.2 seconds have passed after the ball passed through the ball passing opening 414. In that case, the ball receives a load from the slide member 450, while the ball slides after about 1.2 seconds have passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414. No load is received from the slide member 450.

In the present embodiment, even when a ball enters the pair of left and right ball passing openings 414 at the same timing, the ball receives a backward load from the slide member 450 depending on the timing of the sliding operation of the slide member 450. And the case where the sphere does not receive a backward load from the slide member 450 may occur at the same time.

That is, if the slide member 450 slides after about 1.0 second has passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414 and before about 1.2 seconds have passed, the left guide plate The ball flowing down the portion 452 receives a backward load, and the ball flowing down the right guide plate portion 453 does not receive a backward load.

When the slide member 450 slides backward while the ball is on the slide member 450, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage opening 414 to pass the front end of the central flow path 431 is about 0.5. Seconds are reduced.

The breakdown of this 0.5 second is roughly shortened by about 0.3 seconds due to the displacement amount (about 12 mm) in the front-rear direction of the slide member 450, and 0.2 due to the acceleration due to the load applied to the sphere from the slide member 450. Seconds are reduced.

The sphere that has rolled the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 backward passes through the gap 432a or the gap 433a (see FIG. 24B) and flows into the central flow path 431. Since the gap 432a and the gap 433a are misaligned back and forth, when the passage of the sphere in the gap 432a and the passage of the sphere in the gap 433a occur at the same time, they cause a head-on collision in the left-right direction. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball that has passed through the gap 432a or the gap 433a is pushed back by the collision with the ball and flows backward.

Since it is prevented that the ball flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 reaches the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 28), after the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state. It takes the longest time to reach the tilting member 470 is the sphere that was on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 at the time of switching the electric accessory 640a to the excited state, and after that sphere, the tilting member 470. The ball never reaches.

31 (a) to 31 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the timekeeping change of the state of the electric accessory 640a. It should be noted that FIG. 31 (a) shows the timed change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 31 (b) shows the timed change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the third operation pattern. Timekeeping changes in the operating pattern are illustrated.

31 (a) to 31 (c) describe an operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by detecting the passage of a ball at the ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67.

As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the nail arrangement is designed so that the ball flowing down toward the electric accessory 640a passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 without leakage. Compared to the firing interval (0.6 second interval), the operating time of the electric accessory 640a triggered by the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 (single lottery of the normal symbol). Since (the operating time in the standard operating pattern, equivalent to the lottery interval of the normal symbol) is longer, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is not interrupted during the bullet game, and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is always. It is easy to maintain in a state more than 0. Therefore, in the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the reference operation pattern is repeatedly executed without any interval.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the first operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advanced position) during the standby time t1a (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and then the operation time. This is repeated with the pattern in which the slide member 450 is maintained in the excited state (retracted position) at t1b (3.9 seconds in the present embodiment) as the reference operating pattern RP1.

In detail, as a breakdown of 0.1 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in 0.05 seconds, and after the end, the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.05 seconds. Has been done.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the sphere can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, but for 0.1 seconds the sphere moves from sphere arrangement B1 to sphere arrangement B3 (see FIG. 16A). ) Is not enough compared to the time required to displace (about 0.2 seconds).

Therefore, in the state where the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the first operation pattern, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball passage opening 414, and the ball is prevented from being introduced into the central flow path 431. , It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 31B, in the second operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state (advanced position) with a standby time t2a (1.8 seconds in this embodiment), and then the operation time. The slide member 450 is maintained in the excited state (backward position) at t2b (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member 450 is maintained in the non-excited state (forward position) at the standby time t2a, and then operates. The pattern in which the slide member 450 is maintained in the excited state (backward position) at time t2b is set as the reference operation pattern RP2, and this is repeated.

In detail, as a breakdown of 1.8 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in 0.05 seconds, and after the end, the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.75 seconds. Has been done.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball passes through the ball. It passes through the opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided to the central flow path 431 side.

The correspondence between the position and timing of the arrival of the sphere and the time elapsed until the sphere passes the front end of the central flow path 431 will be described. Since it takes about 0.2 seconds to reach the ball arrangements B1 to B3, the ball starts to pass through the ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position.

When the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passing opening 414 is after the first left ball entry period TIL1 (0.2 to 0.6 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position. The sphere that has passed through the central flow path 431 passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the first left discharge period TOR1 (2.6 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.4 seconds later. In this case, since the sphere reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, the flow velocity of the sphere does not change due to the load from the slide member 450.

When the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion 452, the ball is placed in the forward position and after the second left entry period TIL2 (0.6 seconds to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment). The ball passing through the passing opening 414 is shortened by 0.5 seconds by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the second left is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passing opening 414. It passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the discharge period TOR2 (2.5 to 3.7 seconds in this embodiment).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes after the first right entry period TIR1 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position. The ball that has passed through the opening 414 passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the first right discharge period TOR1 (2.2 to 2.8 seconds in this embodiment) 2.0 seconds later. In this case, since the sphere reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, the flow velocity of the sphere does not change due to the load from the slide member 450.

When the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball is placed in the forward position and after the second right entry period TIR2 (0.8 seconds to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment). The passing period of the ball that has passed through the passing opening 414 is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the second right discharge period TOR2 (1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passing opening 414) In this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after 2.3 to 3.3 seconds).

Therefore, in a state where the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the second operation pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric accessory 640a moves at the timing when the ball passes the front end of the central flow path 431. Since it is in a non-excited state (a state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position and the tilting member 470 is arranged in the closed position), the ball is not picked up by the tilting member 470, so that the second winning opening 640 (FIG. 2) is not guided, but is guided to the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres (for the spheres that entered late) gives a load to the spheres during the operation of the slide member 450, and the time required for the spheres to pass is shortened. As a result, when the slide member 450 is maintained in the non-excited state, the time required for the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path 431 (when the ball flows down through the left guide plate portion 452). While operating the slide member 450 with an operation pattern having a period shorter than the time required for (about 2.4 seconds in this embodiment), the sphere is moved through the central flow path 431 within the period of the operation pattern of the slide member 450. Can be passed from the front end of.

Therefore, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 in the state where the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position in the first time (nth time) is passed through the state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the backward position for the second time. The slide member 450 can be passed from the front end of the central flow path 431 in a state where the slide member 450 is arranged at the forward position (n + 1th time).

That is, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening 414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow path 431 are completed in one set of the nth state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position and the n + 1th state. Can be made to.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), in the third operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advanced position) during the standby time t3a (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and then the operation time. This is repeated with the pattern in which the slide member 450 is maintained in the excited state (backward position) at t3b (2.0 seconds in the present embodiment) as the reference operation pattern RP3.

In detail, as a breakdown of 2.0 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.95 seconds. Has been done.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball passes through the ball. It passes through the opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided to the central flow path 431 side.

The correspondence between the position and timing of the arrival of the sphere and the time elapsed until the sphere passes the front end of the central flow path 431 will be described. Since it takes about 0.2 seconds to reach the ball arrangements B1 to B3, the ball starts to pass through the ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position.

When the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passing opening 414 is after the third left ball entry period TIL3 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the third left discharge period TOR3 (2.6 to 3.2 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.4 seconds later.

When the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball is placed in the forward position and after the fourth left ball entry period TIL4 (0.8 seconds to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment). The passing period of the ball that has passed through the passing opening 414 is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the fourth left discharge period TOR4 (1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passing opening 414) In this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after 2.7 to 3.9 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes after the third right entry period TIR3 (0.2 to 1.0 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position. The ball that has passed through the opening 414 passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the third right discharge period TOR3 (2.2 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment) 2.0 seconds later.

When the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball is placed in the forward position and after the fourth right entry period TIR4 (1.0 to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment). The passing period of the ball that has passed through the passing opening 414 is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the fourth right discharge period TOR4 (1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passing opening 414) In this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after 2.5 to 3.5 seconds).

Therefore, in a state where the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the third operation pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric accessory 640a moves at the timing when the ball passes the front end of the central flow path 431. Since it is in an excited state (a state in which the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position and the tilting member 470 is arranged in the open position), the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and the second winning opening 640 (Fig. 2), and not to the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres (for the spheres that entered late) gives a load to the spheres during the operation of the slide member 450, and the time required for the spheres to pass is shortened. As a result, when the slide member 450 is maintained in the non-excited state, the time required for the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path 431 (when the ball flows down through the left guide plate portion 452). Even if the operation pattern is such that the period during which the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than the time required for the slide member 450 (about 2.4 seconds in the present embodiment), while the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position. The sphere can be passed from the front end of the central flow path 431.

Therefore, in the reference operation pattern, the ball that rides on the slide member 450 arranged in the forward position in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a and flows down to the central flow path 431 side is moved to the open position in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. It can be picked up by the tilting member 470 arranged. That is, the passage of the sphere through the sphere passage opening 414 and the passage of the sphere from the front end of the central flow path 431 can be completed by the reference operation pattern RP3.

As described above, the ball guided by the electric accessory 640a passes through different ball inlets corresponding to the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. First, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the first operation pattern, the ball does not pass through the ball passing opening 414, but passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, or falls away from the opening 435a.

Therefore, support for the lottery of special symbols does not occur, and the lottery of special symbols is exclusively based on the entry of the ball into the first winning opening 64. Therefore, the lottery of special symbols should be frequently generated without intervals. Is difficult. When a ball flowing down the front side of the slide member 450 passes through the opening 435a, the prize ball is paid out, so that only support is provided in terms of increasing the number of game balls held by the player.

Next, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the second operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state at the timing when the ball passing through the ball passage opening 414 passes through the front end of the central flow path 431. Since the tilting member 470 is arranged in the closed position, the ball flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2) with the front side of the tilting member 470 facing.

Therefore, the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be frequently generated. In addition, when a ball enters the third winning opening 64b, the prize ball is paid out, which also provides support in increasing the number of game balls held by the player.

Next, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the third operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a is excited at the timing when the ball passing through the ball passage opening 414 passes through the front end of the central flow path 431. Since the tilting member 470 is arranged in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows down toward the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2), that is, toward the detection sensor 462 (see E5).

Therefore, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be frequently generated. In addition, when a ball enters the second winning opening 640, the prize ball is paid out, which also provides support in increasing the number of game balls held by the player.

By making it possible to set the third operation pattern from the first operation pattern in this way, even in a design in which the electric accessory 640a is constantly opened and closed, the ball may enter the second winning opening 640. , The case where the ball is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 can be switched.

That is, when the drive control of the electric accessory 640a is executed in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, the ball is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640, and the electric accessory 640a When the drive control is executed in the third operation pattern, the ball enters the second winning opening 640 frequently.

FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the hold type, the game state, the type of the special symbol, and the fluctuation time. For ease of understanding, only the special symbol 2 is shown, and the special symbol 1 is omitted.

In the special symbol 1, the fluctuation time is set in the same manner in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and when the off symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds. If the jackpot symbol is determined based on the reservation of the special symbol 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lottery state of the special symbol 2 is set to either the low probability state or the high probability state described above, and the game proceeds so that the fluctuation time is different based on the set game state. To do.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the low probability state (normal state or time saving state in the present embodiment), when the out-of-order symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, or when the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time Is determined in 10 minutes. On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

The reason why the fluctuation time is set as long as 10 minutes is to reduce the profit that the player can obtain when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 in the low probability state. As a result, even if a ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 accidentally enters the second winning opening 640, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is prolonged unless the gaming state is shifted to the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain the profit from the lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is allowed up to four. Therefore, when the jackpot symbol is determined by the reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the jackpot based on the determination is 10 to 30 minutes later. A situation may occur in which the special symbol stops changing.

Therefore, a player who is playing at the timing when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2 and a player who is playing at the timing when the jackpot based on the reserved special symbol 2 occurs. There may be different situations or situations where no player is playing at the timing of the jackpot.

In such a case, if the player immediately shifts to the special gaming state at the timing when the jackpot occurs, the player currently playing the game or the player playing the game with another nearby pachinko machine suddenly receives the special game. You may be surprised that it has started, and the player may suspect that it is out of order.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is decided, the conditions for shifting to the special gaming state can be set. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot is determined (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped), the ball is passed through the through gates 66 and 67 according to the instruction displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to shift to a special game state.

That is, by controlling the ball so that it does not shift to the special gaming state until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is suspected of having a failure. The place where the ball is passed in order to shift to the special gaming state is not limited to the through gates 66 and 67. For example, when the ball passes through the general winning opening 63, the ball passes through the special gaming state. It may be controlled as follows.

Further, in the high probability state (probability change state or special probability change state in the present embodiment), when the off symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds.

Further, in the high probability state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the high probability state, when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In the high probability state, since the fluctuation time is set short especially when the small hit symbol is determined based on the hold of the special symbol 2, the ball frequently enters the second winning opening 640 (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the drive control of the electric accessory 640a is executed in the third operation pattern), the player can frequently execute the small hit game and open the specific winning opening 65a, so that the specific winning opening 65a can be opened. A prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth 65a can be frequently obtained.

The setting of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a wide variety of variations may be added as the fluctuation time of each symbol, or the length of the fluctuation time may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols. When the length of the fluctuation time changes according to the number of holdings of the special symbol, in general, the case where the number of holdings is small is compared with the case where the number of holdings is large (when the tank is close to full). The fluctuation time is set to be long.

In the present embodiment, the problem that the player is unexpectedly profitable by firing the ball so as to win the lottery of the special symbol 2 at an inappropriate timing as seen in the conventional model is solved. be able to.

That is, even in the conventional model, the frequency of entering the first ball entrance related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 becomes high as in the present embodiment, and the second ball entrance related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 There was an example in which the ball was configured to be able to switch between a state in which the frequency of ball entry was high.

However, when the number of electric accessory 640a to be installed is limited to one, the electric accessory 640a is installed so as to be attached to either the first entry port or the second entry port, and the other entry port is installed. It is assumed that the electric accessory 640a is not installed in the ball, and the ball can always enter the ball.

In this case, when the ball entry efficiency of the other ball entry port is higher than that of one ball entry port (corresponding to the first winning opening 64, see FIG. 2) arranged in the center of the game board 13, or the other ball entry port. If the profit that the player can obtain is extremely high when the lottery by entering the ball into the ball entrance is a big hit, the ball should be won in one of the ball entrances as a game provided by the pachinko machine 10. Even if the timing is notified, the player may fire the ball toward the other entrance.

Even if measures are taken to reduce the digestion efficiency of fluctuations based on the entry of the other ball by setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in the low probability state to an ultra-long period, it depends on the number of reserved special symbols 2. If the change based on the hold of the special symbol 1 is started, the game is advanced in which the ball is entered into the other entry slot in advance, the special symbol 2 is changed, and then the ball is won in one entry slot. If it is possible to digest the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 while playing the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, it can be said that the deterrent power is low.

In the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, even if it is the timing when the ball should be won in one of the entrances, if the ball enters the other entrance and a big hit is obtained, the pachinko machine will shift to a special gaming state. If the player is to be given a profit that is not intended as a game provided by the machine 10, there is a problem in terms of fairness of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) driven by a single solenoid SOL41 is used to draw the special symbol 1 into the first ball opening (third winning opening). In the state of supporting to increase the frequency of entering the ball (corresponding to 64b) (the state in which the electric accessory 640a is driven and controlled by the second operation pattern), the second entry port (the second) related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 While it is possible to reduce the frequency of entering the ball into the 2 winning openings 640), the state of supporting the frequency of entering the 2nd entry opening related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 (electric accessory 640a). In the state where the drive is controlled by the third operation pattern), the frequency of entering the ball into the first ball entry port related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the frequency of entering the first ball opening (corresponding to the third winning opening 64b) related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 also corresponds to the second ball opening (corresponding to the second winning opening 640) related to the lottery of the special symbol 2. ) Can also be lowered (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is driven and controlled by the first operation pattern).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an unintended benefit as a game provided by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

33 to 35 are cross-sectional views of the slide member 450, the tilting member 470, and the transmission member 480 in the line XXXIII-XXXIII of FIG. 23A. 33 to 35 show the switching operation of the electric accessory 640a from the non-excited state to the excited state in chronological order, FIG. 33 shows the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIG. 34 shows. A state in which the arrangement of the slide portion 450 is maintained in the forward position while the first member 481 rises is shown, and FIG. 35 shows an excited state of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in FIGS. 33 to 35, the outer shape of the plate member 410 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a reference for arrangement.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the operation of switching the electric accessory 640a from the non-excited state to the excited state has a difference between the operation timing of the slide member 450 and the operation timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, only the tilting member 470 operates from the start of operation to the intermediate position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 operate from the intermediate position (see FIGS. 34 and 35). At this time, the operation end timing is substantially the same for the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 (see FIG. 35).

This will be described in detail below. Since the first member 481 operates integrally with the plunger SOL41a (see FIG. 11) of the solenoid SOL41, it moves up and down in synchronization with the drive timing of the solenoid SOL41.

On the other hand, in a configuration in which the driving force is transmitted from the first member 481 to the second member 485 via a pair of transmission plate portions 482 formed at the rear end portion of the first member 481, the electric accessory 640a is not. In the excited state, the upper plate portion 482a is in contact with the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is secured between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486.

The second member 485 is supported so as to be rotatable around the rotation shaft portion 485a, and is locked to the locking plate portion 431b via the slide member 450 (see FIG. 18) to be in a non-excited state (see FIG. 18). The arrangement in (see FIG. 33) is configured to be the end position of the forward rotation displacement.

In the process of raising the first member 481 from the non-excited state, the posture of the second member 485 and the arrangement of the slide member 450 are maintained until the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact with each other, and the tilting member 470. Only tilts. That is, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member 470.

In the process of raising the first member 481, after the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact with each other, the second member 485 is moved to the rotating shaft portion 485a in such a manner that the eccentric protrusion 486 is lifted to the lower plate portion 482b. Rotates in the backflip direction around.

In this way, when switching the electric accessory 640a from the excited state to the non-excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), the timing at which the driving force is required for the tilting member 470 and the timing The timing at which the driving force is required for the slide member 450 is shifted.

In particular, since the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is retracted from above the first member 481 after the driving force transmission to the slide member 450 is started (see FIG. 34), the tilting member 470 The operation is left to its own weight, and the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is spent on the movement of the slide member 450.

Further, as described above, in the switching operation from the non-excited state to the excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 is started in advance, so that the tilting member does not depend on the operating resistance of the slide member 450. The tilting motion of 470 can be started.

Therefore, even when a ball is on the slide member 450, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 is delayed due to the influence of the weight of the ball, so that the tilting member 470 is opened. By arranging the ball at the position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the start timing of the period in which the ball is guided toward the second winning opening 640 is out of control.

Further, even when the ball is arranged on the front side at the start of displacement of the tilting member 470 and the ball is sandwiched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 18), the slide member 450 Since the driving force is transmitted to the tilting member 470 without the driving force being allocated to the sphere, a sufficient force can be generated to displace the ball downward. Therefore, the state in which the ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 can be eliminated at an early stage.

On the other hand, at the stage where the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the slide member 450 (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the driving force assigned to the tilting member 470 becomes extremely small and the driving force is reduced to the slide member 450. When a sphere is arranged on the slide member 450, it is possible to secure a backward load applied to the sphere via the slide member 450.

In the present embodiment, the path of the sphere flowing down toward the tilting member 470 is surrounded by the plate member 410 and the front design member 420 so that the sphere does not deviate from the tilting member 470 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, even in the state before the tilting member 470 is fully opened, the tilting member 470 is displaced (pushed down) to the open position by giving the weight of the sphere to the tilting member 470. Therefore, the sphere can be easily picked up by the tilting member 470.

Even in the switching operation from the excited state of the electric accessory 640a to the non-excited state (the operation of returning from FIG. 35 to FIG. 33), there is a difference between the operation timing of the slide member 450 and the operation timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, from the start of operation (see FIG. 35) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 34), the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is pushed down by the first member 481 of the transmitting member 480, and the lower plate portion 482b of the first member 481 is pushed down. By pushing down the locking protrusion 487 of the second member 485, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 operate together. On the other hand, since the slide member 450 has already reached the forward position at the intermediate position (see FIG. 34), only the tilting member 470 is operated from the intermediate position.

As a result, in the switching operation from the excited state to the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the slide member 450 can be arranged in the forward position before the operation of the tilting member 470 is completed. Therefore, the ball can be easily picked up by the tip portion 451 (the period during which the ball is picked up by the tip portion 451 can be extended as much as possible), and the ball can be easily picked up by the tilting member 470 (tilting). The time it takes for member 470 to reach the closed position can be extended).

Further, in the present embodiment, the ridge portion 455 is not formed on the lower side of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450, and the tip portion 451 is allowed to be elastically deformed in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the switching operation from the excited state (see FIG. 35) to the non-excited state (see FIG. 33), a sphere is sandwiched between the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 20), and the slide member 450 is displaced. Even if a situation occurs in which the tip portion 451 can be elastically deformed to continue the forward displacement of the slide member 450, the rising operation of the tilting member 470 interlocking with the slide member 450 becomes poor. Can be avoided, and the rising operation of the tilting member 470 can be reliably completed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), the tilting member 470 needs a driving force. The timing at which the sliding member 450 is required is different from the timing at which the sliding member 450 requires a driving force.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the operation of the tilting member 470 precedes, and then the operation of the slide member 450 is started. , The timing of the end of operation of the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 is set to be substantially the same.

The load transmission from the slide member 450 side will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, a locking projecting portion 487 is projectably formed at the lower end portion of the second member 485 (a portion below the rotating shaft portion 485a) along the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion 485a.

The locking protrusion 487 is arranged so as to abut the lower plate portion 482b of the first member 481 in the front-rear direction. Due to the frictional force generated in the contact portion, it is possible to suppress the unintentional ascent (lifting) of the first member 481 in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and it is easy to maintain the tilting member 470 in the closed position. Can be done.

Further, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, a load (backward load) in a direction in which the slide member 450 is moved backward and the second member 485 is rotationally displaced in the backward rotation direction in conjunction with the slide member 450 is applied to the slide member 450. Even if this is the case, the lower plate portion 482b is arranged in the moving direction of the locking protrusion 487, so that the rotational displacement of the second member 485 is stopped, and the slide member 450 is also displaced rearward. Can be stopped.

In this case, since the moving direction of the locking protrusion 487 (the direction along the circle centered on the rotating shaft portion 485a) and the moving direction (vertical direction) of the first member 481 intersect (orthogonally). , The first member 481 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the locking protrusion 487. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the slide member 450 is unexpectedly displaced rearward in the non-excited state.

As a result, for example, a thin metal wire (piano wire, wire, etc.) is illegally entered into the game area from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and a load is applied to the slide member 450 through the thin metal wire. It can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts that change the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a.

In particular, by taking measures against the slide member 450, which overhangs the front side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in the non-excited state and may be considered to be easy for a cheating person to apply a load. , It is possible to suppress the continuation of cheating.

FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member 410, the base plate 437, the slide member 450, the tilting member 470, and the transmission member 480 in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. 15 (c). In FIG. 36, the unnecessary configuration of the winning unit 400 for facilitating the understanding of the structure is omitted, and the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion are omitted while the electric accessory 640a is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state. The state in which the operation of the tilting member 470 is temporarily stopped due to the ball being sandwiched between the 437e and the 437e is illustrated.

As described above, the operation of the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 is interlocked with the transmission member 480 as an intermediary. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when a ball is sandwiched between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball biting occurs), the advance of the slide member 450 is suppressed, and the plate member The ball flowing down the front side of the ball passage opening 414 (see FIG. 16) of 410 is configured so as not to be easily picked up by the slide member 450.

Therefore, when a ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball biting occurs), it is easy to avoid a situation in which an unexpectedly large amount of balls stay inside the winning unit 400. can do.

As a result, when a ball is sandwiched between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e, the ball is picked up one after another by the slide member 450, and the ball flows down one after another toward the tilting member 470 side, and the tilting member It is possible to avoid a situation in which the trailing balls overlap one after another with respect to the balls sandwiched between the 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e, causing a malfunction of the tilting member 470.

It will be described back to FIG. In the present embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 is arranged so as to form the upper portion of the center frame 86 at a substantially central position of the left and right width of the game area. A part of the ball launched along the rails 61 and 62 reaches the upper variable winning device 700 while colliding with the nail.

37 (a) and 37 (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. FIG. 37 (a) shows a closed state of the upper variable winning device 700, and FIG. 37 (b) shows an open state of the upper variable winning device 700.

The upper variable winning device 700 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 so as to close the opening formed in the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction, and constitutes a path for the ball to flow down with the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A movable upper lid member 730 that can slide in the front-rear direction through the base plate member 710 and an inverted V-shaped opening 711 bored in the upper portion of the base plate member 710 in the front-rear direction, and the moving upper lid member 730. A detection sensor having a second specific winning opening 700a formed so that a game ball passing through the front side of the base plate member 710 can pass (winning), and a rectangular opening formed in the lower portion of the base plate member 710 in the front-rear direction. A moving floor member 740 that can slide in the front-rear direction through the 712 and an opening 751 through which the ball can pass are arranged on the front side of the base plate member 710 and flow down the front side of the base plate member 710. It includes a plurality of detection sensors 750 configured to be capable of detecting passage.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving floor member 740 is formed in a curved shape by a band-shaped metal plate like the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and is an intermediate rail member planted on the front side of the base plate 60. It is accepted by 781.

A ball removal opening 782 is formed in the base plate 60 at a position rearward of the lowermost end portion of the intermediate rail member 781. The ball received by the intermediate rail member 781 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the ball removal opening 782.

The upper variable winning device 700 is arranged so as to form a game area with the glass unit 16 arranged on the front side. Since the glass unit 16 is transparent, the player can visually recognize the second specific winning opening 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 from the front view.

A resin plate member having a size overlapping the second specified winning opening 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in front view is arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16, and the resin plate member and the base plate member 710 are connected to each other. It may be configured so that the sphere flows down between them. In this case, the visibility of the game ball can be made different depending on whether a permeable member or an opaque member is used as the resin plate member. For example, when an opaque member is adopted, the upper variable winning device 700 can be configured so that the passage of the ball through the specific winning opening 700a or the opening 751 is difficult to see.

The base plate member 710 has an inverted V-shaped opening 711 in which the left and right ends are bored in a narrow inverted V shape close to the left and right center ends of the center frame 86 on the upper side, and left and right on the lower side. A rectangular opening 712 that is bored in a long rectangular shape and a plate-shaped portion that extends to the front side under the inverted V-shaped opening 711 and inclines downward toward the second specific winning opening 700a. A pair of left and right tilted rolling plate portions 713, and plate-shaped portions extending to the front side at positions below the tilted plate portion 713 and on the left and right outside of the detection sensor 750 and facing the detection sensor 750 side. A pair of left and right inclined outer wall plate portions 714 that incline downward and a pair of balls that are extended to the front side at an interval that allows the balls that have passed through the second specified winning opening 700a to be received below the second specified winning opening 700a. A pair of left and right storage plate portions 715, which are plate-shaped portions and whose lower end is arranged close to the rectangular opening 712, and a U-shape having a left-right width that can internally accept a sphere that has passed through the opening 751 below the detection sensor 750. A pair of left and right receiving portions 716 extending to the front side in shape, and a pair of left and right ejecting portions that are bored in the front-rear direction in the shape of the inside of the receiving portion 716 and eject the balls received by the receiving portion 716 to the back side. It has an opening 717.

The inclined rolling plate portion 713, the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, the storage plate portion 715, and the receiving portion 716 are extended to a position sufficient to prevent spilling of a ball from the glass unit 16. That is, in the front view, the sphere does not penetrate the inclined rolling plate portion 713, the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, the storage plate portion 715, and the receiving portion 716, and flows down along the shape thereof.

The inclined outer wall plate portion 714 constitutes a gap on the upper side of the detection sensor 750 from which the ball can enter with the inclined rolling plate portion 713. As a result, the sphere deviated to the left and right outside on the upper side of the detection sensor 750 can be guided to the detection sensor 750 side along the inclination.

The storage plate portion 715 is arranged at a position separated from the central axis of the second specific winning opening 700a by the same distance to the left and right. That is, the central axis of the second specific winning opening 700a is arranged on a plane parallel to the left and right side surfaces of the storage plate portion 715 and arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of storage plate portions 715. As a result, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 700a can easily flow into the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

The moving upper lid member 730 has a plate portion 731 bent in an inverted V shape in front view that is inclined downward to the left and right outside, and the plate portion 731 is on the front side of the base plate 60 in the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700. The ball on the overhanging and moving upper lid member 730 is flowed to the left and right outside along the inclination of the plate portion 731.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the open state, the plate portion 731 is retracted behind the front end surface of the base plate 60, and the ball on the plate portion 731 falls toward the inclined rolling plate portion 713. To do.

At this time, since the ball flowing down along the inclination of the plate portion 731 in the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700 has a velocity toward the left and right outside, the ball is placed on the left and right outer portions of the inclined rolling plate portion 713. Easy to land. Then, it flows along the inclination toward the left and right inward of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a.

That is, it is easy to make the flow direction of the ball flowing on the upper surface of the plate portion 731 a detour direction as compared with the direction toward the second specific winning opening 700a at the shortest distance, and the time until the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. Can be prolonged.

Since the moving upper lid member 730 is inclined to the left and right sides, the above-mentioned effect of prolonging the time until the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a can be produced by a plurality of routes, so that the flow of the ball can occur. By slowing down, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from becoming stagnant.

That is, since it is easy to keep the ball flowing smoothly while prolonging the time until the ball passes, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player suspects that the ball is clogged and stops firing the ball. That is, the launch of the sphere can be promoted.

Further, by prolonging the time until the balls pass, even if a plurality of balls are arranged near the upper side of the second specific winning opening 700a, they always pass through the second specific winning opening 700a. Therefore, by keeping the second specific winning opening 700a in sight, the player can avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 730.

The vertical distance between the plate portion 731 and the inclined rolling plate portion 713 is configured to be the longest on the left and right center side and shortened toward the left and right outside. Further, at the left and right outer ends, the vertical distance thereof is configured to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Therefore, for example, when the ball is on the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state, so that the plate portion 731 of the moving upper lid member 730 slides to the front side. When it moves, a load is generated from the plate portion 731 in the direction of pushing the ball inward to the left and right.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the front side of the plate portion 731 from staying at the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, and the period until the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 700a is It is possible to avoid becoming excessively long.

The moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 operate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other by the driving force of the solenoid 763 described later. In FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), when the outer shape of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 is sufficiently short as a length for preventing the sphere from passing through the gap between the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740. Is shown by a solid line, and is shown by an imaginary line when the gap between the glass unit 16 and the glass unit 16 is long enough for a sphere to pass through.

That is, in the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700, the moving floor member 740 is retracted to the rear side so that the ball can be discharged below the storage plate portion 715 (see FIG. 37 (a)), and the upper variable winning device 700. In the open state, the moving floor member 740 projects forward, and the ball cannot be discharged downward from the storage plate portion 715 (see FIG. 37 (b)).

When a ball flowing down the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 is detected to pass through the second specific winning opening 700a in the open state of the upper variable winning device 700, the winning ball is paid out, while the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 , It functions as a specific area for changing the game state when the ball enters. That is, on the condition that the ball passes through the opening 751 during the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a high probability state, which will be described in detail later.

38 (a) to 38 (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. In FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), an example of a ball entering mode into the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the meanings of the outer shapes of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 shown by solid lines and those shown by imaginary lines are shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (c). It is the same as the meaning in the illustration in FIG. 37 (b).

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the open state of the upper variable winning device 700, the ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. Or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specified winning opening 700a directly flows into the second specified winning opening 700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate portion 713.

As shown in FIG. 38B, the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 700a are sequentially stored in the region composed of the storage plate portion 715 and the moving floor member 740. Then, when the ball fills up to the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 (in a state where the fourth ball P1 that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is arranged near the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715). The ball P2 that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a following the ball P1 cannot enter the gap between the storage plate portions 715, but flows left and right and passes through the opening 751 (FIG. 38 (c). )reference).

That is, when the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate 715 is filled with spheres, the sphere that reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate 715 is opened instead of the sphere arranged inside the storage plate 715. Pass through section 751.

According to the example shown in FIG. 38, a larger number of balls than the maximum number of balls (4 in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. For example, the sphere will pass through the opening 751.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), an example of a ball entering mode into the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the meanings of the outer shapes of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 shown by solid lines and those shown by imaginary lines are shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 39 (c). It is the same as the meaning in the illustration in FIG. 37 (b).

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the open state of the upper variable winning device 700, the state in which the spheres are stored in the region composed of the storage plate portion 715 and the moving floor member 740 is maintained, and the moving upper lid member A ball that has passed the front side of the 730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a, or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning opening 700a is inclined. It directly flows into the second specific winning opening 700a without passing through the rolling plate portion 713.

Similar to the state shown in FIG. 38 (b), the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) is a sphere that can be arranged near the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715 by riding on the sphere stored between the storage plate portions 715. P1 is flowing down.

In this state, when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state, the moving floor member 740 retracts rearward, and the balls stored in the area between the storage plate portions 715 are discharged in order from the bottom (FIG. FIG. 39 (b)).

In FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c), a state in which only one ball is ejected is shown, but the number of ejected balls is the length of time that the moving floor member 740 is retracted backward. Corresponding to this, some spheres are ejected for a short time, and all spheres are ejected for a long time.

Since the balls are discharged from the area between the storage plate portions 715, the fourth ball P1 that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is one ball more than the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715 ( That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), the ball P2, which is arranged downward by the number of discharged balls and has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a following the ball P1, also enters the region between the storage plates 715. Therefore, the sphere P2 is arranged near the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715.

From the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a following the ball P2 cannot enter the gap between the storage plate portions 715 and flows to the left and right to open. Pass through section 751.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 39, a number of balls larger than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 (4 in the present embodiment) serves as the second specific winning opening 700a. Even if it does, the sphere does not necessarily pass through the opening 751.

Whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 is determined near the upper end of the storage plate 715 until the trailing ball P2 passes through the second specific winning opening 700a and reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate 715. It depends on whether or not the state in which the sphere P1 is arranged (see FIG. 38C) is maintained.

The discharge of the balls from the storage plate portion 715 occurs at the timing when the moving upper lid member 730 is closed (see FIG. 39 (b)), and the number of discharged balls is related to the length of the opening / closing operation. The more frequently the opening / closing operation of the member 730 occurs, and the longer the moving upper lid member 730 is closed, the more the sphere P1 is arranged near the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 (FIG. 38 (c). ) Is difficult to maintain, and it is difficult for the sphere to pass through the opening 751. The details of the operation control of the moving upper lid member 730 will be described later.

40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional views of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 37 (a). In FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the front end surface and the rear end surface of the base plate 60 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in chronological order. To. In addition, in FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is shown not as a cross-sectional view but as a side view viewed from the right direction.

The drive transmission device 760 includes a first member 761 pivotally supported by a rotary shaft XXXVII fixedly arranged at a position closer to the back side of the base plate 60, and a rotary shaft fixedly arranged at a position closer to the front side of the base plate 60. The second member 762 pivotally supported by J2, the solenoid 763 configured to slide the plunger 763a in the vertical direction by electromagnetic force, and the plunger 763a of the solenoid 763 are fitted and the plunger 763a slides and moves. A transmission member 764 that slides and moves in the vertical direction in synchronization with the above.

In the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700 (see FIG. 40A), the first member 761 is supported by the support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side in the forward tilted posture, and the moving upper lid member 730 is in the forward position. The second member 762 is supported by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side in a backward posture, and the moving floor member 740 is arranged in a retracted position.

In the open state of the upper variable winning device 700 (see FIG. 40C), the first member 761 is in the backward tilted position, the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position, and the second member 762 is in the forward tilted posture. , The moving floor member 740 is arranged in the forward position.

The first member 761 has a projecting portion 761a projecting from the right side to the right in a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 is located on the projecting portion 761a side (this implementation) so as to be located below the projecting portion 761a. In the embodiment, the rear extension portion 764a extending to the rear side) and the bending extension extending to the projecting portion 761a side in parallel with the rear extension portion 764a on the upper side of the rear extension portion 764a and having the tip bent and formed. It is provided with a setting portion 764b.

The second member 762 is formed so that the projecting portion 762a projects from the right side to the right in a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 is located on the projecting portion 762a side (this implementation) so as to be located above the projecting portion 762a. In the embodiment, a rear extension portion 764c extending to the rear side) and a bend extending to the projecting portion 762a side in parallel with the rear extension portion 764c on the lower side of the rear extension portion 764c and bending the tip. It is provided with an extension portion 764d.

The solenoid 763 is configured to pull up the plunger 763a when an electromagnetic force is generated (excited state), and when the electromagnetic force disappears (non-excited state), the plunger 763a is lowered by the urging force and gravity of the coil spring. To be dropped on.

The interlocking of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 40A, the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is arranged at the lower end position as the plunger 763a is arranged at the lower end position in the non-excited state of the solenoid 763. ..

When the solenoid 763 is excited, the transmission member 764 is slid upward, and in the process of the sliding movement, the protrusion 762a is first pushed up to the upper surface of the bent extension portion 764d. The member 762 begins to rotate in the forward rotation direction (see FIG. 40 (b)).

During this time, the rear extension portion 764a is also slid upward in the same manner, but only the gap between the rear extension portion 764a and the protrusion portion 761a is filled, and the protrusion portion 761a loads the load from the rear extension portion 764a. Not given. That is, the first member 761 still maintains the forward leaning posture.

When the transmission member 764 further slides upward from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), the first member 761 rotates in the backflip direction in such a manner that the projecting portion 761a is pushed up on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 764a, and then rearward. It changes to a tilted posture (see FIG. 40 (c)).

In the present embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member 764 before the first member 761 reaches the forward tilted posture to the backward tilted posture, and the second member 762 reaches from the backward tilted posture to the forward tilted posture. The amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member 764 is the same.

Therefore, the second member 762 is in the forward tilted posture before the first member 761 is in the backward tilted posture. In the present embodiment, the length of the bent extension portion 764d extended to the rear does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion 762a in the forward tilted posture of the second member 762. Therefore, the second member 762 It is prevented that an upward load is generated from the bent extension portion 764d to the second member 762 after the vehicle is in the forward tilted posture.

Further, the rear surface of the downwardly extending portion on the rear end side of the bent extension portion 764d abuts on the protruding portion 762a, and by restricting the displacement diagonally forward and downward, the second member 762 is rotated in the backflip direction. It prevents movement.

In this case, since the load applied from the projecting portion 762a to the transmission member 764 is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 764 from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the projecting portion 762a. It can be facilitated, and the arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c), in the switching operation of the upper variable winning device 700 from the closed state to the open state, the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 do not operate at the same time. , There is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the moving floor member 740 starts the operation toward the forward position in advance, and then the moving upper lid member 730 starts the operation toward the backward position. As a result, even if the ball passes through the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 immediately after the moving upper lid member 730 is displaced to the retracted position, the moving floor member 740 can be already arranged in the forward position at that time. it can.

As a result, the moving floor member 740 is not arranged in the forward position until the ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 passes, and the ball passes the front side of the moving floor member 740 and is between the storage plate portions 715. It is possible to avoid the situation where the balls are not stored.

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the period from the shape of the moving upper lid member 730 until the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate portion 731 passes through the second specific winning opening 700a is designed to be long. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which balls are not stored between the storage plate portions 715.

41 (a) to 41 (c) are cross-sectional views of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 37 (a). In FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), the front end surface and the rear end surface of the base plate 60 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order. To. In addition, in FIGS. 41A to 41C, in order to facilitate understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is shown not as a cross-sectional view but as a side view viewed from the right direction.

The interlocking of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41A, the plunger 763a is arranged at the upper end position in the excited state of the solenoid 763, and the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is arranged at the upper end position.

When the solenoid 763 is in a non-excited state, the plunger 763a is moved downward by the urging force and gravity of the coil spring provided on the solenoid 763, and the transmission member 764 is slid downward. First, the first member 761 starts to rotate in the forward rotation direction in such a manner that the projecting portion 761a is pushed down to the lower surface of the bending extension portion 764b (see FIG. 41 (b)).

During this time, the rear extension portion 764c is also slid downward in the same manner, but only the gap between the rear extension portion 764c and the protrusion portion 762a is filled, and the protrusion portion 762a loads the load from the rear extension portion 764c. Not given. That is, the second member 762 still maintains the forward leaning posture.

When the transmission member 764 further slides downward from the state shown in FIG. 41B, the second member 762 rotates in the backflip direction in such a manner that the protrusion 762a is pushed down to the lower surface of the rear extension portion 764c, and the rear member 762 rotates backward. It changes to a tilted posture (see FIG. 41 (c)).

In the present embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member 764 before the first member 761 reaches from the backward tilted posture to the forward tilted posture, and the second member 762 reaches from the forward tilted posture to the backward tilted posture. The amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member 764 is the same.

Therefore, the first member 761 is in the forward tilted posture before the second member 762 is in the backward tilted posture. In the present embodiment, the length of the bent extension portion 764b extending rearward does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion 761a in the forward tilted posture of the first member 761. Therefore, the first member 761 It is prevented that a downward load is generated from the bent extension portion 764b to the first member 761 after the vehicle is in the forward tilted posture.

Further, the rear surface of the portion extending upward on the rear end side of the bent extension portion 764b abuts on the projecting portion 761a, and by restricting the displacement diagonally forward and upward, the first member 761 is rotated in the backflip direction. It prevents movement.

In this case, since the load applied from the projecting portion 761a to the transmission member 764 is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 764 from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the projecting portion 761a. It can be facilitated, and the arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in the switching operation of the upper variable winning device 700 from the open state to the closed state, the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 do not operate at the same time. , There is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the moving upper lid member 730 starts the operation toward the forward position in advance, and then the moving floor member 740 starts the operation toward the backward position. As a result, with respect to the spheres that trigger the closing of the moving upper lid member 730 (for example, the spheres that pass through the second specific winning opening 700a in the specified number), until the spheres reach the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715. You can extend the time.

That is, since the time until the moving floor member 740 is moved to the retracted position and the ball starts to be discharged from the storage plate portion 715 can be extended, the ball that triggers the closing of the moving upper lid member 730 is the opening of the detection sensor 750. The possibility of passing through the section 751 can be increased.

In particular, since the ball that triggers the closing of the moving upper lid member 730 passes through the front side of the plate portion 731, it is not affected by the inclination of the plate portion 731 and flows down while maintaining a speed inward to the left and right. There are many. Therefore, since the period until reaching the second specific winning opening 700a can be shortened, the player can reach the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715 before the moving floor member 740 is displaced to the retracted position. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the short distance from the second specific winning opening 700a to the detection sensor 750, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion 715 is arranged directly below the second specific winning opening 700a. As long as the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750, and the expectation of the player can be raised.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 700a opened in the first round in the jackpot game of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of FIG. 42, FIGS. 2, 4 and 37 to 41 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the second specific winning opening 700a in the first special operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening 700a in the first special operation pattern. 42 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening 700a in the third special operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740, which is performed when the jackpot game is given, will be described.

In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c), the upper opening and lower closing means a state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position and the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the forward position. , Upper closing and lower opening means a state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position and the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the retracted position. In the present embodiment, the displacement timings of the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are as described above, but FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c) do not express the timing deviation. Illustrated briefly.

First, a case where the operation of the first special operation pattern is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 operate based on the first special operation pattern is prepared. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 moves the upper lid member until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the 730 in the forward position, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP1 has elapsed.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the moving upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening 700a. It is controlled to cause the moving upper lid member 730 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the first special operation pattern, the state in which the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the forward position is always continued in the first round game R, and therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 38, a specified number of balls In the process of passing the ball through the second specific winning opening 700a, a larger number of balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 (4 in the present embodiment) is stored on the storage plate portion 715 side. Can be made to flow down toward. Therefore, a case where the sphere passes through the opening 751 can be easily generated.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 763 to hold the moving upper lid member 730 in the forward position until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time sufficient for a ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 to pass the front side of the moving floor member 740 immediately before the moving upper lid member 730 is displaced to the forward position. In this embodiment, it takes about 2 seconds.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R, the specific winning opening 65a Is closed, and the second round game R ends.

After that, similarly, the third round to the maximum 15th round round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the timer means holds the specific winning opening 65a in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (for example, 11 seconds) elapses, and that time. The jackpot game ends with the progress of.

Next, a case where the operation of the second special operation pattern is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 operate based on the second special operation pattern is prepared. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 moves the upper lid member until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the 730 in the forward position, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP1 has elapsed.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the moving upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening 700a. It is controlled to cause the moving upper lid member 730 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the second special operation pattern, in the first round game R, the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position and the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the forward position, and the movable upper lid member 730 is in the forward position. The state in which the moving floor member 740 is arranged and the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the retracted position is switched about every second.

In other words, the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 700a side and the ball can be stored at the position between the storage plate portions 715, and the guidance of the ball to the second specific winning opening 700a side are restricted. At the same time, the state in which the balls stored at the positions between the storage plate portions 715 are discharged is switched about every second.

In the present embodiment, the discharge of balls from the position between the storage plate portions 715 is formed so as to be completed in about 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the retracted position for about 1 second, a maximum of five balls can flow down the front side of the moving floor member 740 from the position between the storage plate portions 715. Further, considering the ball firing interval allowed for the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position for about 1 second. The number of spheres passing in front of is at most about three.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, in the process of passing the specified number of balls through the second specific winning opening 700a, the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 can be discharged. Will be done. On top of that, the number of spheres that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plate portions 715 is larger than the number of spheres that can be guided to the gap side between the storage plate portions 715 per unit time (about 1 second). It is possible to configure a state in which a larger number of spheres than the maximum number of spheres (4 in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 is stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is difficult to cause a case where the sphere passes through the opening 751.

On the other hand, since the opening 751 is not apparently closed, there is a possibility that the ball may rarely enter the opening 751 due to the irregular flow of the ball, the inclination when the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and the like. Since it is possible to make the player think that there may be, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700.

Since the control after the round game R of the first round is completed is the same as the case of operating in the first special operation pattern, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a case where the operation of the third special operation pattern is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 operate based on the third special operation pattern is prepared. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 moves the upper lid member until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the 730 in the forward position, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP1 has elapsed.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the moving upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening 700a. It is controlled to cause the moving upper lid member 730 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the third special operation pattern, in the first round game R, the moving upper lid member 730 is held in the retracted position and the moving floor member 740 is held in the forward position for about 1 second, and the moving upper lid member 730 is held in the forward position. In addition, the state in which the moving floor member 740 is held in the retracted position for about 0.2 seconds is alternately switched.

In other words, a mode in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 700a side and a state in which the ball can be stored at a position between the storage plate portions 715 is maintained for about 1 second, and to the second specific winning opening 700a side. The mode in which the guidance of the spheres is restricted and the spheres stored at the positions between the storage plate portions 715 are maintained for about 0.2 seconds is alternately repeated. According to this time setting, the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position can be formed up to about 25 times in the first round game.

In the present embodiment, the discharge of balls from the position between the storage plate portions 715 is formed so as to be completed in about 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, at most one ball can flow down the front side of the moving floor member 740 from the position between the storage plate portions 715 while the moving floor member 740 is arranged in the retracted position for about 0.2 seconds. Further, considering the ball firing interval allowed for the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position for 1 second while the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged. The number of spheres passing through the front side is at most about three.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, in the process of passing the specified number of balls through the second specific winning opening 700a, the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 can be discharged. Will be done.

On top of that, between the storage plate units 715 per second unit time (about 0.2 seconds), rather than the number of spheres that can be guided to the gap side between the storage plate units 715 per unit time (about 1 second). Since the number of spheres that can be discharged from the gap of the storage plate portion 715 is smaller than the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 (4 in this embodiment), the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage plate portion 715 It is easier to configure the state of accumulating in the gap between them than in the case described above in the second special operation pattern. Therefore, it is easier to cause the sphere to pass through the opening 751 than in the case described above in the second special operation pattern.

On the other hand, the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate portions 715 are discharged at a rate of one each time the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are displaced (at intervals of about 1.2 seconds). Depending on the frequency with which the ball passes the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 and the time interval, the round game R of the first round may end without the ball passing through the opening 751.

According to the third special operation pattern in the present embodiment, the possibility that the ball passes through the opening 751 can be increased by increasing the frequency of the ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 730, so that one round. Continue hitting the ball firing mode in the game in the round game R of the eyes (without stopping the firing of the ball, the ball is launched at the ball firing interval allowed by the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment). It is easy to make it fire continuously).

As a result, the player intentionally stops firing the ball and launches the ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds or more as a technical intervention to obtain profits such as excess prize balls. Since it is possible to easily prevent the player from performing the mode), it is possible to equalize the profits that the player can obtain regardless of the player's experience.

Since the control after the round game R of the first round is completed is the same as the case of operating in the first special operation pattern, the description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 43A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b and the second hit random number table 202c will be described later.

FIG. 43 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 43 (c) shows the first random number counter C3 and the determination value in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 43 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C3 and the determination value in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. is there.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 43B, the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b is set. Whether the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. It is a table in which a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not it is set is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is determined to be a hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b. It is a table in which random number values (judgment values) to be performed are set. In the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when it is determined that the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is a value of "1 to 319", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 based on the entry into the second winning opening 640 is It is a set table. In the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of lottery of the special symbol 1 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b, the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is one, and the random number value. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1, the probability of being big hits of special symbol 1 is "1/320".

On the other hand, at the time of lottery of the special symbol 2 based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is one, and while the total number of random numbers is 320, the random number that becomes the jackpot Since the total number of numerical values is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol 2 is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability that the special symbol 2 will be a small hit is "318/320".

The above description in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponds to the low probability state in the present embodiment. In the high probability state, in addition to "0", if the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 in the high probability state is "1/32".

FIG. 44 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the first hit type selection table 202b and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and FIG. 44 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in the 2 hit random number table 202c and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 44 (a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0". The jackpot A is defined in association with the range of "~ 19" (see 202b1 in FIG. 44 (a)).

When the jackpot A is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is regarded as a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the third operation pattern. The state set to will continue until the next jackpot is won.

In this case, the game state corresponds not only during the probabilistic change but also during the special probabilistic change (during the probabilistic change of a special symbol with a high frequency and a small hit). Therefore, the player can win a ball in the specific winning opening 65a opened by the small hit before winning the next big hit, and can receive a lot of prize balls to be paid out.

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of the 15th round is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the first. The state set in the operation pattern of 2 continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

In the situation where the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the firing of the ball to the upper variable winning device 700 is not satisfied, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the first round. It is assumed that the game is over.

Such a situation may occur due to ball clogging of the ball launching unit 112a or ball clogging in the game area. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special symbol is determined, the jackpot game is controlled so as not to start until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, so that the ball clogging is not noticed. It is possible to easily avoid the situation where the jackpot game is started.

It should be noted that the display on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot of the special symbol is determined should be devised so as not to confuse the player whether to aim at the through gates 66 and 67 or the upper variable winning device 700. Is preferable. For example, immediately after the jackpot is decided, the through gates 66 and 67 and the arrow pointing to the position of the upper variable winning device 700 are displayed to aim, and after the jackpot game is started, the through gates 66 and 67 The display of the arrow pointing to the position may be erased, and only the display of the arrow pointing to the position of the upper variable winning device 700 may be left. As a result, the flow of the game in which the ball is passed through the through gates 66 and 67 and then the ball is inserted into the upper variable winning device 700 can be smoothly performed.

If the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the ball launched toward the upper variable winning device 700 is swept left and right along the inclination of the moving upper lid member 730, flows through the game area 301, and is a through gate. It will pass 66 and 67.

The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49" (see 202b2 in FIG. 44A).

When the jackpot B is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of eight rounds is regarded as a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to will continue until the next jackpot is won.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to the probability change. Therefore, basically, the player cannot receive a lot of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the game is advanced so that the next jackpot can be won in a short time. ..

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) in the eighth round is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the first. The state set in the operation pattern of 2 continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 44A).

In the case of a jackpot C, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the second special operation pattern, and it is difficult for the ball to pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. The game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 4 rounds is set to the low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern, and the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. Continue until finished.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to the time saving. Therefore, basically, the player cannot receive a lot of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the game is advanced so that the next jackpot can be won in a short time. ..

Further, since the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the gaming state after the jackpot B, whether the currently executing gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state is an operation mode of the electric accessory 640a. It cannot be determined from. Therefore, if the player is not notified whether the currently executing game state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, it is possible to configure a game mode in which the player is made to predict. On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the currently executing gaming state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning 4 It's a big hit in the round, so basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 44 (a)).

When the jackpot a is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern as in the case of the jackpot A, and the ball can easily open the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. pass. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is regarded as a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the third operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the special probability change) continues until the next big hit is obtained.

The jackpot b is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 49" (see 202b5 in FIG. 44A).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of the 15th round is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the first. The state set in the operation pattern of 2 continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

When the jackpot b is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of eight rounds is regarded as a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the probability change) continues until the next jackpot is won.

The jackpot c is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 44A).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) in the eighth round is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the first. The state set in the operation pattern of 2 continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

When the jackpot c is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the third special operation pattern, and the ball opens the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 depending on the firing mode of the player's ball. A case where the sphere passes and a case where the sphere does not pass through the opening 751 are formed.

When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) in the fourth round is regarded as a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the probability change) continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) in the fourth round is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the first. The state set in the operation pattern of 2 (corresponding to the time saving) continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

In any of these cases, since the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the same in the second operation pattern, whether the currently executing gaming state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state can be determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a. Cannot be determined. Therefore, if the player is not notified whether the currently executing game state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, it is possible to configure a game mode in which the player is made to predict.

On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the currently executing gaming state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state. Actually, whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is a high probability state or a low probability state depends on whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, so that the player can visually recognize the opening 751. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, which is possible, the player can often grasp whether the currently executing gaming state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.

Therefore, if the player does not know whether the currently executing game state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, when designing the variation effect of the third symbol, the opening is made in the first round. It is preferable to provide a device for making the portion 751 difficult to see and a device for turning the eyes away from the opening 751.

For example, as a device to make the opening 751 difficult to see, the amount of light of the irradiating means for irradiating the upper variable winning device 700 with light is reduced particularly near the opening 751 or extremely strong near the opening 751 to make it dazzling. By doing so, the visibility of the opening 751 itself may be reduced, or by gathering the player's line of sight on the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the attention to the opening 751 is relative. You may try to reduce it.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), there is a 30% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls.

On the other hand, the possibility of winning a jackpot of 15 rounds is set higher than that of the special symbol 1 lottery. Therefore, compared to the situation where the special symbol 1 is drawn, the situation where the special symbol 2 is drawn can raise the expectation that a jackpot of 15 rounds may be obtained.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 44 (b)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, "5-204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 44 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5-239" is defined as a determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 44 (b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, and the second random number table 202c. However, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

Then, in both the high-probability state of the normal symbol and the low-probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is frequently hit. Therefore, it is possible to configure a state in which the electric accessory 640a operates frequently.

Next, the ending effect in the present embodiment will be described. First, the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10 and a group of operation buttons arranged near the upper plate 17 will be described.

FIG. 45 is a top view of the front frame 14 and the outer frame 11. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. However, in the present embodiment, it is used to execute a specific effect by being operated during the jackpot game (during the jackpot effect), and the details will be described later.

Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a second ball lending operation unit 40b having the same function as the above-mentioned ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged. The second ball lending operation unit 40b is provided with a second frequency display unit 41b, a second ball lending button 42b, and a second return button 43b.

When the second ball lending operation unit 40b is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the second ball lending operation unit 40b is operated according to the operation. Balls are rented.

Specifically, the second frequency display unit 41b is an area in which the remaining amount information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as the remaining amount information by a number. The second ball lending button 42b is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is on the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Is supplied to. The second return button 43b is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

The second ball lending operation unit 40b is not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, the second lending is performed. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball operating portion 40b to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

Further, a ball pulling operation unit 44 is arranged on the left side of the second ball lending operation unit 40b on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. When the ball pulling operation unit 44 is pushed in, the ball can flow down from the upper plate 17 toward the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1), so that the player can shoot the ball stored in the upper plate 17 all over. At any time, the game can be ended at any time.

Further, a direction operation unit 45 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The direction operation unit 45 has four operation units that can be independently operated and are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the up, down, left, and right directions in the top view. For example, the volume output from the pachinko machine 10 is high or low. When adjustments are made, the emission intensity of a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 or a light emitting means such as an LED is adjusted, or the type of effect related to a game (for example, a variable effect) can be switched in a plurality of modes. It is operated by a player or the like when the switching is performed.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 46 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the variation effect. FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0,2,4,6,8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets that fill the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit a" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd number "7" is added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B" or "big hit b" (see FIG. 44), a variable display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" are added excluding "7" are aligned is displayed. If it is "big hit C" or "big hit c" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a continuous advance notice effect suggesting (notice) that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit of the special symbol may be performed. , When the variable display is performed, a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, on the effective line L1, the combination of main symbols is "3", "4", "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1), so-called "chance". "Eyes" are always displayed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first winning opening 64, the third winning opening 64b, or the second winning opening 640. It is an area for displaying a number, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image (not shown) is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times the ball is entered. It is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol of the “straw hat”) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved ball number symbols. Is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that there are 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

Similarly, if a ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times the ball can be entered is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol (in the present embodiment, a “star-shaped” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbols. Is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that there are 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b is displayed side by side in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 46 (b)). , The number of reserved balls when entering the second winning opening 640 is displayed side by side in the lower half of the small area Ds1.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the third winning opening 64b and the ball entering the second winning opening 640 are each held up to four times. The maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect, and FIG. 47 (c). ), FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. 47 (e) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, or the third winning opening 64b (starting winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger, and then the first 1 The symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device The variation display of the third symbol is performed according to the variation display of 37.

When the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is first started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds). After that, the display switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) having the same number are aligned, the variable effect ends, and then the big hit effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol lottery will be held, and the next variable production will start.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed.

The fanfare effect notifies the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specified winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the player In the round production, the number of rounds to be started is notified to the player, and the ball is urged to be fired toward the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a. It is a production to notify that a large number of prize balls will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), in the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and the game value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (the magnitude of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the next jackpot). An ending display effect is executed to notify the player whether or not a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out by the time the player is awarded, a short period of time for a normal symbol, etc.).

In addition, as an ending effect, depending on the case, a company name display effect that informs the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 and a return of a card or the like (recording medium, other coins, etc.) having a balance at the end of the game or when leaving the seat. A card forgetting prevention display effect that suggests the operation for is executed, but the details will be described later.

When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the voice lamp control is performed from the main control device 110 at the timing when the stop display of the third symbol is performed. A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare effect is started following the variable effect.

Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the fanfare effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, the state is until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is repeated as many times as the number of times according to the jackpot type (up to 15 rounds, (See FIG. 44 (a)) Continued.

After the first round is started and the second specific winning opening 700a is opened, a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) elapses, the second specific winning opening 700a Is closed and the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached with the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 42) in between, and the main control device 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, following the round effect corresponding to the first round, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started.

After the second round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). At the same time, the second round ends. Then, the start timing of the third round is immediately reached with the interval time Int1 between rounds (see FIG. 42) in between, and the main control device 110 transmits a round number command indicating the third round to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the third round is started following the round effect corresponding to the second round.

When the third round is started, the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the second round. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Will be done. As a result, each round effect from the first round to the final round (up to 15 rounds) is executed in order.

Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a in the final round is completed. As a result, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and in the ending display effect, the game value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (the magnitude of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the next jackpot). The player is informed of whether or not a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out by the time the player wins the prize, a short period of time for a normal symbol, etc.

In the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), a prize ball display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game at a position slightly higher than the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. 801 is displayed, and an identification display 802 indicating the content of "chance 100 times" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a reliability display 803 indicating the content of "Don't give up yet" is displayed on the upper side of the identification display 802, and a time display 811 described later is displayed on the lower side of the identification display 802.

The time display 811 has a role of notifying the end time of the ending effect (including the case where only the ending display effect is performed), and the right end portion moves from an appropriate timing toward the end position 812, the details of which will be described later.

On this screen, a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "big hit C" (see FIG. 44), or the lottery result is "big hit c" and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 during the big hit game (see FIG. 44). It is displayed when the ball does not pass through (see FIG. 37), and the identification display 802 shows the second operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. It means that the state in which the operation is controlled is continued, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability (1/320 in this embodiment).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the player recognizes that the possibility of the next big hit is small by the reliability display 803. Can be done.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a feeling of expectation of the next big hit, so that the game can be enthusiastically continued.

Further, in the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), a prize indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game at a position slightly higher than the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The sphere display 801 is displayed, and the identification display 802 indicating the content of "probability fluctuation rush" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a reliability display 803 indicating the content of "expected large" is displayed on the upper side of the identification display 802, and a time display 811 described later is displayed on the lower side of the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "big hit B" or "big hit b" (see FIG. 44), and the identification display 802 shows the special symbol after the big hit is completed. Until the next big hit, the electric accessory 640a will continue to be controlled by the second operation pattern, and the big hit probability of the special symbol will be high (1/32 in this embodiment). Means.

Further, in the identification display 802, the reliability display 803, and the time display 811 on this screen, the lottery result is "big hit c", and the ball passed through the opening 751 (see FIG. 37) of the detection sensor 750 during the big hit game. In that case, the prize ball display 801 is set to "600" shown in FIG. 47 (c), unlike the numerical value shown in FIG. 47 (d).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the player can recognize that the next big hit can be expected by the reliability display 803.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a feeling of expectation of the next big hit, so that the game can be enthusiastically continued.

The contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the identification display 802 may display "next big hit confirmed", and the reliability display 803 may display "further prize balls are being prepared".

Further, in the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), a prize indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game at a position slightly higher than the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The sphere display 801 is displayed, and the identification display 802 indicating the content of "rush rush" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a reliability display 803 indicating the content of "super-expected large" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811 described later is displayed below the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "big hit A" or "big hit a" (see FIG. 44), and the identification display 802 shows the special symbol after the big hit is completed. Until the next big hit, the electric accessory 640a continues to be controlled in the third operation pattern, and the big hit probability of the special symbol is high (1/32 in this embodiment). Means.

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 can be expected to be the next big hit, and more profits can be obtained. The player can recognize that there is.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the expectation of the player for the next big hit, a further profit (for example, in the stage before the next big hit is obtained). Since it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the number of prize balls can be expected to increase by winning a prize using a small hit, the game can be enthusiastically continued.

In this way, the identification display 802 is configured to change the display according to the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the player can obtain the identification display 802 after the jackpot game ends by visually recognizing the ending display effect. You can make profit forecasts.

The contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of "rush rush", "super-probability change rush" may be used, "small hit rush rush" may be used, or a unique name such as "super advantageous mode" may be attached and displayed.

Next, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect will be described. In the ending effect in the example shown in FIG. 47 (b), the company name display command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the ending display effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the company name display effect is started following the ending display effect.

Next, a card forgetting prevention display command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the company name display effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the card forgetting prevention display effect is started following the company name display effect.

When the card forgetting prevention display effect ends, the ending effect ends. After the ending effect, if there is a pending start prize, the next special symbol will be drawn and the next variable effect will start. On the other hand, if there is no pending start prize (if the number of reserved balls is 0), the variable standby screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and FIG. 48 (b) illustrates the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. It is a figure. In FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the company name display effect is executed after the ending display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed after the company name display effect (see FIG. 47 (b)). explain.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the execution time of the ending effect is evenly divided into the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and the execution time of the ending effect is 15. Set to seconds. In this case, the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are allotted for 5 seconds each.

As shown in FIG. 48A, in the company name display effect, the manufacturer name (Company A) of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed as the specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48B, when the card forgetting prevention display effect is switched, the card is returned from the insertion slot of the card unit as the specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. A still image (or video) showing the situation is displayed, and a comment "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed below it.

In the ending effect in the examples shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), after the ending display effect executed for 5 seconds is completed, the company name display effect is executed for 5 seconds and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a gap of 10 seconds from the end of the ending display effect to the start of the next variable effect. In this embodiment, it is devised so that the free time can be effectively used.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the time is near the lower end of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in common during the execution of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect. The time display 811 in which the right tip portion moves to the right with the lapse of time is displayed, and the frame button display 813 schematically showing the frame button 22 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Scales are lined up and down on the right side of the button display 813, and the current light emission intensity (light emission of LEDs arranged on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 (see FIG. 1))) A scale that displays the light emission intensity of the means and the set value of the screen brightness of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can grasp it (displays that it is the second set value from the top among the five stages). The display 814 is displayed, and a caution comment display 815 with the content "Be careful of light for a long time" is displayed below the frame button display 813 and the scale display 814.

In the present embodiment, during the ending effect, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is controlled to be effective. That is, during the ending effect, the operation of the frame button 22 when the frame button display 813 is not displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is invalid.

On the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the frame button display 813 and the scale display 814 are hidden in the middle of the card forgetting prevention display effect (at the time of the remaining 4 seconds), but the specific display 810, the time display 811 and The caution comment display 815 continues to be displayed until the card forgetting prevention display effect is completed.

Here, even if the game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, or the third winning opening 64b, the change of the special symbol is stopped during the execution of the ending effect, so that the special symbol is reserved. The number of balls does not decrease. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is full, the player cannot receive the special symbol lottery even if he / she enters the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, or the third winning opening 64b. .. On the other hand, after the ending effect is finished, the special symbol will start to change, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbol will decrease from full, and the player will be special by letting the ball enter the starting port. The possibility of receiving a lottery for symbols increases.

Further, during the jackpot game including the ending effect, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the normal operation pattern. In the present embodiment, since it is the first operation pattern (see FIG. 31A), it is difficult for the game ball to be picked up by the slide member 450. On the other hand, when the ending effect is completed, the electric accessory 640a is driven by the operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type, so that the game ball is easily picked up by the slide member 450, and the game ball wins the second prize. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

Under these circumstances, it is easy for a player to think that it is less loss to start firing a ball after the ending effect is completed after the round game is completed. However, in a conventional game machine, when the ending effect ends. It was hard to understand. That is, since the game result is shown by the ending display effect, it is easy for the player to think that the variable effect will start immediately, and it is thought that the ball will be fired as soon as the screen is switched from the ending display effect, but in reality, the company name is displayed. The ending effect may remain as much as the effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and when you notice that, the ball has already been fired, and the player fires during the ending effect and wastes several balls. You may feel dissatisfied with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movement mode of the time display 811 is set so that the right end portion of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 at the same time as the end of the ending effect. That is, since the right end of the time display 811 moves to the right with the passage of time and the variation effect is started after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812, the length of the ending effect and the ending effect Since it is possible to easily grasp the end time, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball is fired during the ending effect.

The movement mode of the time display 811 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the display mode of the time display 811 and the terminal position 812 is the length between the left end portion of the time display 811 and the terminal position 812. It is designed as a guideline for the length of 10 seconds. If the end of the ending effect is 10 seconds or more at the start of the ending effect, the right end of the time display 811 remains stopped or extremely late until the timing of about 10 seconds until the end of the ending effect. It is set to move at a speed, and at a timing of about 10 seconds until the end of the ending effect, the right end portion of the time display 811 is set to start moving to the right at a constant speed with the passage of time.

On the other hand, if it takes less than 10 seconds from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect, the right end portion of the time display 811 immediately starts moving. In this case, the moving speed of the time display 811 is set as the speed at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 at the same time as the end of the ending effect (that is, if the end of the ending effect is 5 seconds). It is set at twice the speed when moving to the terminal position 812 over 10 seconds).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the character "GO" suggesting the start of launching the game ball is always displayed above the terminal position 812. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 or a few seconds before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 (for example, by the time the launched ball reaches the through gates 66,67). The characters "GO" may be displayed before the average number of seconds required). In this case, the display may be such that the characters "GO" are displayed from the hidden state, or the characters "GO" may be displayed so as to be materialized from the state where they are displayed semi-transparently.

In this case, if the firing of the ball is started with the character "GO" displayed as a mark, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from passing through the through gates 66 and 67 before the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the player does not have to visually follow the moving time display 811. As a result, the player's playing burden can be reduced.

The display mode of the characters "GO" is not limited in any way. For example, it may be replaced with a comment such as "start launching a ball" or "start launching when the bar arrives". Also, the size of the characters of "GO" does not have to be the same at all times. For example, the character "GO" may gradually increase as the right end of the time display 811 moves. In this case, the maximum size of the character "GO" is displayed semi-transparently, and the timing at which the size of the character "GO", which gradually increases, matches the maximum size indicated by the translucent character. , The right end of the time display 811 may be controlled to match the timing of reaching the terminal position 812.

In the state shown in FIG. 48, when the player did not execute the operation of the frame button 22, the time display 811 reached the terminal position 812 during the continuation of the card forgetting prevention display effect shown in FIG. 48 (b). Later, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the screen as shown in FIG. 46 (b), and the variation effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is generally shown that the frame button 22 can be operated. The screen switching of the third symbol display device 81 when the player executes the operation of the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 48 will be described.

FIG. 49 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect, and FIG. 49 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen immediately after the end of the ending effect.

In FIG. 49 (a), the third symbol that is switched when the player operates the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) in the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) (the state in which the frame button display 813 is displayed). The screen of the display device 81 is illustrated.

Even when the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a) by operating the frame button 22, the right end portion of the time display 811 is the same as when the frame button 22 is not operated. Moves to the right with the passage of time, and after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 switches to the screen as shown in FIG. Is started.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the player operates the frame button 22, a still image (or moving image) and a “card” showing a state in which the card is returned from the insertion slot of the card unit as the specific display 810. The comment "Please be careful not to forget to take it" is moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is reduced. As a result, the distinctiveness of the specific display 810 can be lowered, and the player's attention can be easily directed to a portion other than the specific display 810.

A directional operation unit display 816 schematically showing the directional operation unit 45 is displayed near the center of the screen, and on the left side of the directional operation unit display 816, scales are arranged vertically to display the current emission intensity setting value. A vertical scale display 817 is displayed so that the player can grasp it (displays that it is the second set value from the top among the five stages), and the scale is displayed on the left and right below the direction operation unit display 816. The horizontal scale display 818 is displayed, which is lined up and displays the current volume setting value so that the player can grasp it (displays that it is the third setting value from the top (right) of the five stages). ..

Further, below the caution comment display 815, a second caution comment display 819 with the content "Be careful of long-time sound" is displayed. The caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are displayed corresponding to the types of objects for which the player can confirm the set value.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the state where the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the vertical scale display 817 can be changed by operating the vertical buttons of the direction operation unit 45. can do. That is, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the buttons operated to change the set value of the scales, so that the player can easily understand the operation method.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the state where the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the horizontal scale display 818 can be changed by operating the buttons in the left-right direction of the direction operation unit 45. can do. That is, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the buttons operated to change the set value of the scales, so that the player can easily understand the operation method.

Further, the operation of the direction operation unit 45 is controlled to be invalid when the direction operation unit display 816 is not displayed on the display screen. As a result, the player can recognize whether the current operation of the directional operation unit 45 is valid or invalid only by confirming the presence or absence of the directional operation unit display 816.

A light bulb-like display is displayed near the end of the vertical scale display 817, and the vertical scale display 817 indicates the light emission intensity (for example, the LEDs arranged on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the indicator lamp 34). The player can easily understand that the light emission intensity of the light emitting means such as (see FIG. 1)) and the brightness of the screen of the third symbol display device 81) can be set. In addition, a musical note is displayed near the end of the horizontal scale display 818, so that the player can easily understand that the volume can be set by the horizontal scale display 818.

In the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), unlike the state shown in FIG. 46 (b), which is the same as the state in which the variation effect of the special symbol is started, the direction operation unit display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display are displayed. The 818 is arranged in the small area Ds3 in a reduced state.

Therefore, for a while after the ending effect is finished and the variable effect is executed, the direction operation unit display 816 is continuously displayed, and the emission intensity setting can be changed or the volume setting can be changed. can do.

In the present embodiment, the direction operation unit display 816 is continuously displayed during the high-speed variation display of the first variation effect started after the end of the ending effect, and is hidden after the high-speed variation display of the variation effect is completed. Will be done.

As a result, at least at the timing when the symbol is stopped and the variation effect ends, the direction operation unit display 816 is hidden and the operation of the direction operation unit 45 is invalidated. Therefore, the player can press the direction operation unit 45. Since the situation of operation does not occur, it is possible to avoid the situation of concentrating on operating the direction operation unit 45 and overlooking the stop display of the symbol.

In addition, during high-speed fluctuations, the number of reserved balls becomes vacant, so that the player starts firing balls in order to receive a lottery for a special symbol, but the directional control unit 45 can be operated with one hand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damaging the firing of the ball. While the player is firing several balls (after firing), the direction control unit display 816 is hidden.

From the second variation effect started after the end of the ending effect, the direction operation unit display 816 is hidden. That is, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the state as shown in FIG. 46 (b), and the variation effect is executed.

FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the ending effect and the jackpot type in the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, the ending display effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type (indicated by ◯ in FIG. 50).

Further, since the company name display effect is executed when the game state that rushes in after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous state for the player, the player who visually recognizes the company name display effect is subjected to after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the game state.

In the present embodiment, the company name display effect is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot type "big hit A" or "big hit a" that enters the special probability variation state after the jackpot game ends (indicated by a circle in FIG. 50), and other The company name display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game of the jackpot type (indicated by x in FIG. 50).

It should be noted that the condition for executing the company name display effect corresponds to the game state in which the player enters after the jackpot game ends, and does not correspond to the number of payouts in the jackpot game. That is, even if the number of payouts in the jackpot game is, for example, 0, the company name display effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the number of payouts in the jackpot game of "big hit A" or "big hit a" is the maximum number among all the jackpot types, so that when the company name display effect is executed, the player is notified. , It is possible to realize that the jackpot game with the maximum number of payout prize balls has been executed.

Further, since the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the number of payouts in the jackpot game is 8 rounds or more (predetermined number or more), the player who visually recognizes the card forgetting prevention display effect is asked. You can feel the joy of winning many prize balls.

In the present embodiment, the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effect of the 15-round jackpot type "big hit A" or "big hit a" and the 8-round jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit b". (Indicated by ○ in FIG. 50), the card forgetting prevention display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game of other jackpot types (indicated by × in FIG. 50).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the ending effect differs depending on the jackpot type. Since the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are each for 5 seconds, the execution time of the ending effect will be different depending on the combination.

For example, the ending effect in the jackpot game with the jackpot type "big hit A" or "big hit a" is executed over 15 seconds, and the ending effect in the jackpot game with the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit b" is 10. The ending effect in the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is "big hit C" or "big hit c" is executed over a period of 5 seconds.

Due to such circumstances, the player may be confused about the timing of launching the ball, which is difficult to determine when the ending effect ends. However, in the present embodiment, the time display 811 (see FIG. 48) ends the ending effect. It is possible to grasp the time point.

That is, even if the time of the ending effect is different, the moving speed of the right end portion of the time display 811 is changed (or the moving start point of the time display 811 is changed), so that the time display 811 is at the end position 812. It is the same that the ending effect ends when the time is reached, and by visually recognizing the time display 811, the player can prevent the player from getting lost in the firing timing of the ball. As a result, the player's playing burden can be reduced.

It should be noted that what is defined and invariant according to the jackpot type is the execution time of the ending effect, and the content during the ending effect is variable. For example, even if the ending time is 15 seconds, if a certain condition is satisfied (or randomly), the ending display effect is set to 10 seconds, and the remaining 5 seconds are the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect. May be executed. In particular, at the time of the first big hit, the player's interest can be improved by setting the ending display effect longer.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface portion 431a as a portion supporting the ball flowing down the central flow path 431 in the winning unit 400 is configured as a fixed plate portion has been described, but the winning unit 2400 of the second embodiment has been described. Then, the shape of the portion supporting the sphere flowing down the central flow path 2431 is changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 and 52 are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 2400 according to the second embodiment on the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15 (c). FIG. 51 shows a non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a, and FIG. 52 shows an excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a.

The electric accessory 640a includes a tilting member 470 which is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a slide member 2450 which is partially different in shape from the slide member 450 of the first embodiment. The slide member 2450 is only partially different in shape, and the operation mode is the same as that of the slide member 450 of the first embodiment.

The difference between the slide member 2450 and the slide member 450 in the first embodiment will be described. The slide member 2450 includes a lower projecting portion 2456 projecting downward from the front end portion of the central fixing portion 454, and a front projecting portion 2457 projecting forward from the front end portion of the central fixing portion 454.

In the winning unit 400 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the arrangement of the central fixing portion 454 and the arrangement of the rear wall portion 434 of the middle member 430 do not overlap in the vertical direction, and the middle member 430 It was possible to assemble the slide member 450 so as to cover it from above, but in the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the front projecting portion 2457 has a shape that projects forward from the rear end portion of the rear wall portion 434. It is said that the assembly method cannot be diverted as it is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface portion 431a, the locking plate portion 431b, and the rear wall portion 434 have a left-right width centered on the cross section shown in FIG. 51 (a left-right width of about 3 mm in the present embodiment). A notch 2431d is continuously formed in. That is, the notch 2431d is formed as an open portion that cuts from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear wall portion 434 and continues from that position to the intermediate position of the bottom surface portion 431a and to the intermediate position of the locking plate portion 431b.

Since the left-right width of the notch 2431d is formed as a left-right width slightly longer than the left-right width of the front protrusion 2457, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 52, the arrangement of the front protrusion 2457 of the slide member 2450 and the middle stage The arrangement of the notch 2431d of the member 2430 can be overlapped.

Therefore, the front projecting portion 2457 of the slide member 2450 can pass through the middle member 2430 in the vertical direction through the notch 2431d, so that the middle member 2430 can be assembled by covering the slide member 2450 from above. There is.

The lower protrusion 2456 is a portion for defining the front moving end of the slide member 2450, which is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the rear surface of the locking plate portion 431b on the outside of the notch 2431d.

In the first embodiment, the front end of the slide member 450 is defined at a position where the front end portion of the central fixing portion 454 abuts on the rear surface of the locking plate portion 431b (see FIG. 18), but also in the second embodiment. The second implementation is performed because the front movement end of the slide member 2450 is defined at a position where the front surface of the lower protrusion 2456 projecting directly below from the front end of the central fixing portion 454 abuts on the rear surface of the locking plate portion 431b. The front movement end position of the slide member 2450 in the embodiment and the front movement end position of the slide member 450 in the first embodiment are the same positions.

The front protrusion 2457 includes a pair of ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b that are projected upward. The ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b are arranged so as to be arranged in the front-rear direction at the left and right positions where the notch 2431d can be entered, and the ball interference protrusion 2458a on the front side of the ball interference protrusion 2458b on the rear side. Is formed so that the upper end position is lower.

The front-back tilt angle of the straight line passing through the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458b and the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458a is the same as the front-back tilt angle of the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a of the middle member 2430. Is formed in.

The protrusion length of the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b is such that when the slide member 2450 is arranged in the forward position, it projects upward by 1 to 2 mm from the upper surface of the bottom surface 431a ( See FIG. 51). As a result, when the slide member 2450 is arranged in the retracted position, the upper end positions of the ball interference projecting portions 2458a and 2458b are cut so as not to protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a, and the inside of 2431d (up and down of the middle member 2430). It can be accommodated (inside the wall thickness dimension in the direction).

As a result, when the slide member 2450 is arranged in the forward position, the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b can be brought into contact with the sphere flowing down the central flow path 2431, while the slide member 2450 is placed. When it is arranged in the retracted position, it can be configured so that the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 does not come into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b.

According to the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, in the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment, in addition to the action caused by the winning unit 400 described in the first embodiment, the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the central flow path 2431 is increased. It can be changed in some cases.

For example, when the slide member 2450 is in the excited state (retracted position), the ball interference projecting portions 2458a and 2458b retract to the outside of the central flow path 2431, so that the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is a ball. There is no deceleration due to contact with the interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b.

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, the ball on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7) when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (backward position). , It is accelerated in the flow direction (arrow B direction) by being pushed backward by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), in the entire area of the flow path of the sphere composed of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431. , The flow speed of the ball tends to increase.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2450 is in a non-excited state (advanced position), the ball interference projecting portions 2458a and 2458b project from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a toward the central flow path 2431, so that the central flow path The ball flowing down the 2431 comes into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b and is decelerated. As a result, the deceleration action of the flow of the sphere in the central flow path 2431 is more likely to occur as compared with the case where the slide member 2450 is in the excited state (backward position), and the flow of the sphere can be calmed down (rectification). Can be made to).

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (advanced position), the ball is on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7). Even so, since the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 is displaced in the direction that creates a gap between the ball and the ball (the direction in which the ball is not pushed in, the arrow F direction), the change in the flow velocity of the ball does not change. Suppressed (not accelerated).

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (advanced position), the entire area of the flow path of the sphere composed of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431. In, the flow speed of the ball tends to be slow.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the action of increasing the flow speed of the sphere is the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow. While it occurs in the entire flow path of the sphere composed of the path 2431 and the sphere, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (advance position), the action of slowing the flow speed of the sphere acts as a left guide plate. It occurs in the entire flow path of the sphere composed of the portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431.

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (advanced position) and when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (backward position), the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the center It is possible to increase the difference (difference in length) between the flow path 2431 and the period required to pass through the flow path of the sphere composed of the flow path 2431.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending back and forth in the winning unit 400 has been described, but in the winning unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending left and right. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning unit 3400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 53 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning unit 3400b as another example of the winning unit 3400. is there. In FIG. 53, in the nail KG1, the small diameter portion to be driven into the base plate 60 is shown by a solid line, and the bulging portion of the front end portion is shown by an imaginary line.

The winning unit 3400 is arranged, for example, on the downstream side of the through gate 67 in the right game area 303 (see FIG. 2), and is configured as a unit that guides the flow of the ball arranged in the game area 301.

The winning unit 3400 includes a flow path constituent portion 3410 formed of a plate-shaped member arranged between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) of the game board 13, and a game area. It is slid and displaced in the front-rear direction so that the state changes between the protruding state (corresponding to the state of the forward position) arranged inward and the retracted state (corresponding to the state of the backward position) retracted to the outside of the game area. It includes a slide member 3420.

The slide member 3420 is separately arranged with the first slide member 3421 near the ball inlet 3411 and the second slide member 3422 near the ball outlet 3412 of the flow path constituent portion 3410, and these are integrally arranged on the back side. By being configured in, it slides and displaces integrally.

That is, the second slide member 3422 is in the protruding state in synchronization with the first slide member 3421 in the protruding state, and the second slide member 3422 is in the retracted state in synchronization with the retracted state of the first slide member 3421. The slide member 3420 is integrally configured so as to be.

A variation of the flow mode of the ball that has entered the winning unit 3400 will be described. When the ball that has entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, the first slide member 3421 is in the retracted state, or the first slide member 3421 is in the protruding state. However, when the ball is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (a time shorter than the time required for the ball to be guided to the right side (for example, 0.2 seconds)), the ball is configured as a flow path from the midway discharge unit 3413. It is discharged to the outside (outside on the left side) of the portion 3410. In the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the midway discharge unit 3413 is configured to deviate from the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b and flow down.

On the other hand, when the ball that has entered through the ball inlet 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, the first slide member 3421 is long enough to guide the ball (for example, 0.2 seconds). ), The sphere is guided into the flow path constituent portion 3410.

The subsequent flow path of the ball changes depending on whether the second slide member 3422 is in the protruding state or the retracted state at the timing when the ball guided inside the flow path component 3410 reaches the ball outlet 3412. To do.

That is, if the second slide member 3422 is in the protruding state, the ball passes directly above the second winning opening 640 while rolling on the upper surface of the second sliding member 3422, and moves toward the third winning opening 64b. Flow down. In the present embodiment, a detection sensor SE1 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the third winning opening 64b, and this detection sensor SE1 is the detection sensor 442 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7). Works in the same way as.

That is, when the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE1a, the first winning opening switch is turned on, and the main control device 110 (FIG. 3) is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. 4) is configured to draw a special symbol 1.

On the other hand, if the second slide member 3422 is in the retracted state, the ball flows down to the second winning opening 640 side. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE2 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is arranged on the upstream side of the second winning opening 640, and this detection sensor SE2 is the detection sensor 462 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 11). Works in the same way as.

That is, when the detection sensor SE2 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE2a, the second winning opening switch is turned on, and the main control device 110 (FIG. 4) is configured to draw a special symbol 2.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged directly below the second sliding member 3422, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, but the distance between the detection sensor SE2 and the nail KG1 directly above it The distance between the detection sensor SE2 and the flow path component 3410 on the opposite side (right side) is designed to be longer than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the second slide member 3422 is in the retracted state, and some of the balls that have flowed down to the second winning opening 640 are configured to deviate from the second winning opening 640 and flow down.

Although not shown, a ball (second prize) that flows below the prize unit 3400 is provided by disposing a variable prize device 65 that opens and closes in a small hit game under the prize unit 3400. It is possible to allow a ball that has deviated without entering either the mouth 640 or the third winning port 64b, for example, a ball that has flowed to the discharge portion 3413 side in the middle, to enter the specific winning opening 65a opened by the small hit game. it can.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the formation of the midway discharge portion 3413 may be omitted, and the general winning opening 63 may be arranged directly below the first slide member 3421. At this time, when the ball that has entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, the first slide member 3421 is in the retracted state, or the first slide member 3421 is in the protruding state. If the ball is switched to the retracted state in a very short time (shorter than the time required for the ball to be guided to the right (for example, 0.2 seconds)), the ball will be the general winning opening 63. Enter the ball.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B, a detection sensor SE3 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the general winning opening 63, and the detection sensor SE3 is the detection sensor 435 in the first embodiment. It works in the same way as (see FIG. 11). That is, when the detection sensor SE3 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE3a, neither the lottery of the special symbol nor the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the winning openings may be arranged close to each other so that the balls discharged to the left from the ball outlet 3412 will not be spilled. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B, the third winning opening 64b is arranged close to the ball outlet 3412, so that the second slide member 3422 is projected to the outside (left side) of the flow path constituent portion 3410. ) Is surely entered into the third winning opening 64b.

As a result, the ball of the second slide member 3422 may deviate from the third winning opening 64b due to collision with the nail KG1 and the flow path may change, as compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 53 (a). It is possible to avoid a situation in which a prize ball cannot be obtained by a ball guided to the outside (left side) of the flow path constituent portion 3410 in the protruding state.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 is composed of a plurality of members in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged apart from each other, and the interval between the timing when the upstream member hits the ball and the timing when the downstream member hits the ball is lengthened. Although the case has been described, in the winning unit 4400 of the fourth embodiment, the electric accessory 4420 is composed of a single member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the winning unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 54A, the electric accessory 4420 is set to be a forward position in which the electric accessory 4420 is arranged so as to project over a region (game area) between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The state is illustrated, and FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the electric accessory 4420 is set to a retracted position where the electric accessory 4420 is retracted from the game area and arranged rearward.

In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shape of the portion of the electric accessory 4420 that is arranged at a position that blocks the passage of the sphere inside the winning unit 4400 is shown by a solid line and inside. Is illustrated by painting with a dot pattern, while the outer shape of the portion arranged at a position that does not block (allow) the passage of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 54, in the nail KG1, the small diameter portion to be driven into the base plate 60 is shown by a solid line, and the bulging portion of the front end portion is shown by an imaginary line.

The winning unit 4400 has a flow path configuration formed of a plate-shaped member arranged between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) of the game board 13 to form a flow path of a sphere. A portion 4410 and an electric accessory 4420 that is arranged inside the flow path constituent portion 4410 and changes the flow path of the sphere are provided.

The electric accessory 4420 has a rolling plate portion 4421 that has an upper surface for rolling the ball and is guided so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to project from the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion 4421, and the ball flows down. A disturbing rod portion 4425 formed with a strength capable of interfering with the vehicle is provided.

In the present embodiment, when the ball that has entered the flow path constituent portion 4410 passes through the ball inlet 4411 formed openly at the upstream end of the flow path constituent portion 4410 and reaches the position where the electric accessory 4420 is arranged, it is electrically operated. The flow path of the ball differs depending on whether the accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position or the backward position.

First, when the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position when the ball entering the flow path component 4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory 4420 is arranged (see FIG. 54 (a)), the ball rolls. It rolls on the upper surface of the moving plate portion 4421 and flows through the flow path constituent portion 4410 to the left side (specific winning opening 65a side).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is arranged at a position separated from the front surface of the base plate 60 by 1.5 times or more the diameter of the sphere. For example, by entering an opening formed in a plate-shaped member arranged between the flow path constituent portion 4410 and the glass unit 16 and covering the flow path constituent portion 4410 from the front side, the flow flows down in the flow path constituent portion 4410. It is placed in a position that does not interfere with the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the retracted position when the ball entering the flow path component 4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory 4420 is arranged (see FIG. 54 (b)), the ball rolls. It flows down the front side of the moving plate portion 4421 and flows down the flow path constituent portion 4410 (the second winning opening 640 side).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is arranged at a front-rear position capable of colliding with the ball flowing down the flow path constituent portion 4410 and obstructing (preventing) the passage of the ball. As a result, when the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 54B), it is arranged below the plate-shaped portion (for example, the rolling plate portion 4421) of the flow path constituent portion 4410. Even if the ball bounced by the plate-shaped portion 4412) flies toward the obstruction rod portion 4425, the guide portion 4413 that guides the ball to the specific winning opening 65a side beyond (passes through) the obstruction rod portion 4425 It can be prevented from flowing.

That is, the ball that flew toward the obstruction bar 4425 is killed by the obstruction bar 4425 to the left and falls directly below to enter the second winning opening 640 or bounces to the right. After that, the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 4412 is rolled to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the ball entrance 4411 passes downward through the electric accessory 4420 depending on whether the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position or the backward position. It is divided into either a direction of rolling down on the plate-shaped portion 4412 and a direction of rolling down on the guide portion 4413 after passing through the electric accessory 4420 to the left.

One of the purposes of forming the path and the winning openings 65a and 640 like the winning unit 4400 is to guide the majority of the balls that have entered the ball entrance 4411 to the specific winning opening 65a side (guidance state) and the balls. It is conceivable to control the operation of the electric accessory 4420 so that the majority of the balls that have entered the entrance 4411 are not guided to the specific winning opening 65a side (non-guidance state).

This control can be achieved by switching the operation pattern (opening and closing length) of the electric accessory 4420, but if the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 of the electric accessory 4420 is short, it is in a non-guidance state. However, it is easy for the ball to be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side.

For example, the time required for the rolling plate portion 4421 to be placed in the forward position is shorter than the time required for the ball arriving a few seconds after the rolling plate portion 4421 is placed in the forward position to pass through the rolling plate portion 4421. Even if it is set, when the ball arrives at the same time as the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the forward position (when there is almost no difference between the arrival timing of the ball and the timing when the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position). Or, when the ball arrives in a state where the momentum is larger than usual (for example, a state in which rotation in the acceleration direction is occurring), the ball is guided while the rolling plate portion 4421 is arranged in the forward position. A situation may occur in which the portion 4413 passes through.

As a countermeasure, first, the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421, which is usually designed to have a left-right length of 55 mm or less, may be designed to be longer (for example, 77 mm or 100 mm). .. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the time when the rolling plate portion 4421 is arranged in the forward position in the non-guided state of the electric accessory 4420.

Further, by designing the rolling plate portion 4421 to have a long left-right width, it is possible to increase the number of balls riding on the rolling plate portion 4421 in a state where the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position.

When the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed with a normal left-right length (55 mm or less), the number of balls that can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 at the same time is at most 2 to 3, but the length is longer (for example). , 100 mm), when the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed, a state in which four or more balls are simultaneously placed on the rolling plate portion 4421 can be generated.

If the electric accessory 4420 is displaced to the retracted position while four or more balls are simultaneously on the rolling plate portion 4421, the four or more balls are guided to the second winning opening 640 side at a time, which is short. The number of reserved special symbols 2 can be increased to 4 (full tank) in time.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, unlike the case where the balls are guided to the electric accessory 640 one by one, the electric accessory 4420 is used for the plurality of balls on the upper surface of the electric accessory 4420. Immediately after being displaced to the retracted position, the ball falls to the second winning opening 640 side at the same time, so it is required that the electric accessory 4420 keep the arrangement in the retracted position in order to allow a plurality of balls to flow down to the second winning opening 640 side. The length of time that is spent can be shortened. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 4420.

As a next measure, secondly, the flow of the ball moving from the downstream end of the rolling plate 4421 to the guide 4413 just before the rolling plate 4421 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position is blocked by the obstruction rod 4425. It can be configured so that it can be cut off by.

That is, the position where the obstruction rod portion 4425 is arranged protrudes toward the guide portion 4413 from the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion 4421 (in the present embodiment, it is oblique at right angles to the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421). By projecting toward the upper left direction, the ball projects toward the guide portion 4413), so that the ball can reach the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 in the guide state of the electric accessory 4420 (see FIG. 54 (a)). Even when the ball is about to pass, if the electric accessory 4420 is placed in a non-guided state (see FIG. 54 (b)) immediately after that, the flow of the passing ball can be blocked by the obstruction rod portion 4425. ..

As a result, even when the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 is short, the guide portion 4413 is reached immediately before the state in which the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position is switched to the state in which the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the backward position. It is possible to make it difficult for the moving ball to be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side.

In other words, the ball that is about to pass the rolling plate portion 4421 to the left side can be pulled back to the second winning opening 640 side by the obstruction rod portion 4425. As a result, the number of balls riding on the electric accessory 4420 can be increased while the electric accessory 4420 is arranged in the forward position by maximizing the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421. By arranging the 4420 in the retracted position, the number of balls dropped toward the second winning opening 640 can be increased.

Further, as a result, more balls than the number of balls assumed from the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 are placed on the second winning opening 640 side immediately after the electric accessory 4420 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position. It can be made to flow down.

That is, in addition to the ball riding on the rolling plate portion 4421, the ball that is pulled back (backflowed) to the obstructing rod portion 4425 after passing through the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion 4421 is also the second prize. Since it can flow down to the 640 side, the winning frequency of the second winning opening 640 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the flow path constituent portion 4410, the ceiling portion 4414 is formed so as to cover the flow path from above so that the ball does not flow into the electric accessory 4420 side except for the ball inlet 4411. That is, since the introduction of the ball into the electric accessory 4420 is limited to the ball entrance 4411, the number of balls staying on the electric accessory 4420 is larger than expected (for example, the number of balls is two or more stages). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the stagnation is accumulated in such a manner.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether or not the ball passes over the rolling plate portion 4421. That is, when the period during which the electric accessory 4420 is maintained in the forward position exceeds the time required for the ball to pass over the rolling plate portion 4421, the ball flows to the specific winning opening 65a side for the first time.

In this respect, as described in the first embodiment described above, as long as the tip portion 451 has passed, the sphere may or may not pass over the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. This is different from the case where it does not affect the switching of the flow path.

The state of the electric accessory 4420 illustrated in FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) in the first embodiment described above, and FIG. 54 (a) The state of the electric accessory 4420 illustrated in b) corresponds to the excited state of the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, the rolling plate portion 4421 corresponds to the slide member 450, and the obstruction rod portion 4425 corresponds to the tilting member 470.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the upper variable winning device 700 causes the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 700a to flow down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715 has been described, but the fifth embodiment has been described. In the upper variable winning device 5700, a switching device 5770 for switching the flow of the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is arranged. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are front views of the upper variable winning device 5700 in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a closed state of the upper variable winning device 5700, and FIG. 55 (b) shows an open state of the upper variable winning device 5700.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the upper variable winning device 5700 according to the fifth embodiment is a foundation formed by partially diverting the configuration of the foundation plate member 710 according to the first embodiment. A plate member 5710 is provided.

The foundation plate member 5710 lowers the arrangement of the structure below the inclined outer wall plate portion 714 downward, and thereby, in the space created between the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, a pair of left and right intermediates. A plate portion 5718 and a pair of left and right discharge openings 5719 that are bored in the front-rear direction along a part of the intermediate plate portion 5718 and the edge portion and discharge the ball received by the intermediate plate portion 5718 to the back surface side. Be prepared.

The intermediate plate portion 5718 is a plate-shaped portion extending to the front side toward the space formed between the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, and is a sphere from the left and right outer end portions. An inclined plate portion 5718b that is connected to a prevention wall portion 5718a for preventing spillage and a lower end portion of the prevention wall portion 5718a and extends in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the lateral position side of the second specified winning opening 700a. And is connected to the extended end of the inclined plate portion 5718b, and is formed in an arc shape having a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 centering on the rotating shaft J51 of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 of the switching device 5770. The arc plate portion 5718c is provided.

The switching device 5770 has a ball receiving rotating member 5771 configured to be rotatable around the rotating shaft J51 and a pair of left and right flow restrictions arranged at positions facing the ball receiving rotating member 5771 from the left and right. A member 5778 is provided.

The flow control member 5778 is formed in an arc shape having a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 centering on the rotating shaft J51, and projects to the front side of the base plate member 5710 from the front surface of the ball receiving rotating member. At the forward position that regulates the passage of the ball discharged from the 5771, and the backward position that retracts to the back side of the front surface of the base plate member 5710 and allows the ball discharged from the ball receiving rotation member 5771 to pass. It is configured to be displaceable.

The ball receiving rotation member 5771 is a disk-shaped member arranged directly below the center of the left and right of the second specific winning opening 700a and capable of rotating around a rotation axis J51 extending in the front-rear direction, and is a second specific winning opening. Four ball receiving recesses 5772, which are recessed from the outer peripheral side so as to be able to receive the ball that has passed through 700a, are formed at intervals of 90 degrees.

A drive device (not shown) different from the solenoid 763 (see FIG. 40) is used for the drive device for driving the ball receiving rotation member 5771 and the drive device for driving the flow control member 5778. In this case, the drive device for driving the ball receiving rotation member 5771 may also be used as the drive device for driving the flow control member 5778.

In the present embodiment, in the round game of the first round, the solenoid 763 is driven by the first special operation pattern (see FIG. 42 (a)), and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 clocks at a rotation speed of 90 degrees / second. It is always rotated in the clockwise direction.

The flow control member 5778 is set so that the operation mode in the first round game can be changed according to the jackpot type. For example, the jackpots A, B, a, and b (see FIG. 44) are always fixed at the forward position, the jackpot C is always fixed at the backward position, and the jackpot c has the forward position and the backward position every second. Driven to switch.

The flow mode of the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is surely accepted in any of the ball receiving recesses 5772 of the ball receiving rotating member 5771.

When the ball receiving rotation member 577 rotates while the ball is received in the ball receiving recess 5772, the ball received in the ball receiving recess 5772 is also displaced as the arrangement of the ball receiving recess 5772 changes.

During the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member 5771, the lower edge portion of the ball receiving recess 5772 (the lower edge portion of the pair of edge portions at the radial outer end portion centered on the rotation axis J51 of the ball receiving recess 5772). When the flow control member 5778 is arranged in the retracted position when the side forming the flow lower surface of the sphere is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b, the sphere is flush with the inclined plate portion 5718b. The ball is discharged from the receiving recess 5772, and the ball is discharged from the upper variable winning device 5700 through the discharge opening 5719. The balls discharged in this way are not stored in the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

On the other hand, when the lower edge portion of the ball receiving recess 5772 is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b during the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member 5771, the flow restricting member 5778 is arranged in the forward position. The discharge of the ball is regulated by the flow control member 5778, and the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771 is continued without the ball being discharged from the ball receiving recess 5772. After that, when the ball receiving recess 5772 is arranged at a position between the pair of left and right arc plate portions 5718c, the ball passes through the gap between the pair of arc plate portions 5718c and heads toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715. Can flow down and be stored.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the second specified winning opening 700a flows down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715, and the second specified, in accordance with the operation mode of the switching device 5770. A case where the ball passing through the winning opening 700a is discharged without reaching the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715 can be configured.

Therefore, by driving the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 in the first special operation pattern, the balls guided in the gap between the pair of storage plate portions 715 are stored without being discharged during the round game. Even in this mode, when the arrangement of the flow control member 5778 is switched during the round game, as in the case of the jackpot c, a pair of storages is stored depending on the timing of entering the second specific winning opening 700a. Since there may be cases where the number of balls guided to the plate portion 715 is sufficiently large (in the present embodiment, the number is 5 or more) and cases where the number of balls is less than that, the player's upper variable winning device 700 You can improve your attention.

Further, it is not sufficient that one ball passes from the switching device 5770 to the pair of storage plate portions 715 side, but the number exceeds the number that fills the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 (the present embodiment). Then, the ball can be surely passed through the opening 751 only after the ball has passed (5 or more), so that the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700 should be maintained in a high state for a long time. Can be done.

According to the present embodiment, it is more when the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a and is displaced by the ball receiving rotating member 5771 than when the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. Flow speed is slowed down. As a result, it is possible to delay the time until the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a reaches the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 from immediately reaching the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 immediately after the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the end time of the ending effect of the jackpot game can be grasped by the time display 811 has been described, but in the launch time display 6811 in the sixth embodiment, an appropriate ball is launched immediately before the end of the ending effect. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is designed so that the timing can be grasped. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

56 (a) and 56 (b) are views exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 56 (a), the display screen after the specific display 810 is moved from the center by operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) is shown, and in FIG. 56 (b), FIG. 56 (a) shows. The display screen after being switched by operating the frame button 22 in the state shown is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56B, when the frame button 22 is operated during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the direction operation unit display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 display the sphere. It is switched to the launch position suggestion display 6820 that suggests a position where the player may benefit from firing and aiming, and the launch time display 6811 is displayed on top of the time display 811.

The launch position suggestion display 6820 points to a game area display 6821 that (schematically) displays an illustration or a photograph of (at least a part of) the game area, and a part of the game area display 6821 with an arrow or the like to indicate a ball. It includes a target suggestion display 6822, which displays so that the player can know that it should be fired and aimed.

In the present embodiment, the launch position suggestion display 6820 displays the entire game board 13 (see FIG. 2) as the game area display 6821, and the through gates 66 and 67 (see FIG. 2) point as the target suggestion display 6822. Along with being shown, a comment "Aim here" is displayed.

The launch position suggestion display 6820 is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of displaying the entire game board 13 as the game area display 6821, a part of the game board 13 may be displayed. For example, as a part including the through gates 66 and 67, only the portion above the wind turbine WF (see FIG. 2) may be displayed, or the area around the through gates 66 and 67 (or the through gates 66 and 67) may be displayed. (Around any of) may be displayed.

When displaying a part of the game board 13, the game area display 6821 may be displayed as a still image or as a moving image. For example, in the launch position suggestion display 6820, the game area display 6821 is configured to schematically display the periphery of the ball to be launched, and the ball is launched and flows down to reach the through gates 66 and 67. Move the game area display 6821 along the route (display as a moving image), and when the sphere reaches the through gates 66 and 67, fix the game area display 6821 with the display around the through gates 66 and 67 (display as a still image). You may do it.

Further, for example, as the target suggestion display 6822, instead of displaying an arrow to indicate the target position by firing the ball, the position may be displayed so as to illuminate, or other parts other than the position may be displayed. It may be displayed so as to be relatively conspicuous by displaying it darkly.

Further, the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822 may be fixed from the beginning, or may be fixed after moving. For example, the light may be moved along the path through which the ball is emitted, and when the light reaches the through gates 66 and 67, the light may be fixed at the position where the light reaches the through gates 66 and 67.

By displaying the launch position suggestion display 6820 in this way, the player can easily grasp where to aim and launch the ball after the ending effect is completed. As a result, the progress of the game after the end of the ending effect can be smoothed.

The firing time display 6811 is displayed as if the right tip portion moves to the right with the passage of time, similarly to the time display 811. The moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the time display 811. Further, the right tip of the launch time display 6811 is arranged closer to the terminal position 812 than the right tip of the time display 811, and before the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, The right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the end position 812.

In the present embodiment, the sphere fires for the length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It is designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from the time when the through gate 66, 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822) is reached.

Therefore, the ending effect of the jackpot game currently being executed is completed by the time the ball launched at the timing when the right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 passes through the through gates 66 and 67.

In this way, by launching the ball with the launch time display 6811 as a guide, it is possible to prevent the launched ball from passing through the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). As a result, it is possible to maximize the profit obtained by the player in the lottery of the second symbol executed by detecting the ball at the through gates 66 and 67.

That is, in general, the lottery of the second symbol, which is executed by detecting a ball at the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game, is performed with a normal probability, so that the profit obtained by the player is the minimum. It becomes. After the jackpot game is over, the probability of drawing the second symbol may increase depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, by avoiding the ball passing through the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game, the second symbol It is possible to maximize the profit that the player can obtain in the lottery (the profit that changes depending on the difference in the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a).

Furthermore, by launching the ball with the launch time display 6811 as a guide, the jackpot from the end of the jackpot game is compared with the case where the ball is launched after the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It is possible to shorten the time until the ball first passes through the through gates 66 and 67 after the end of the game.

In this way, by firing the ball with the launch time display 6811 as a guide, a situation occurs in which the ball launched just before the end of the jackpot game passes through the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). While maximizing the profit that the player can obtain by minimizing the number of hits, the progress of the game is smoothed by shortening the period until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67 after the jackpot game is completed. Can be done.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 57 shows a display screen when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 from the state shown in FIG. 56 (b).

As shown in FIG. 57, when the right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the end position 812, the display mode of the target suggestion display 6822 is switched. In the present embodiment, the shape of the frame surrounding the comment is changed in the target suggestion display 6822, and the “aiming” part is enlarged.

That is, the timing at which the “aiming” portion of the target suggestion display 6822 is expanded coincides with the timing at which the right tip of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812. Therefore, if the launch position suggestion display 6820 is made to be visually recognized without causing the player to visually recognize the launch time display 6811, the player is made to launch the ball at an appropriate launch timing from the timing of the change of the target suggestion display 6822. Can be urged to.

As a result, the player can grasp not only the position at which the ball is launched and aimed, but also the timing at which the ball is launched by visually recognizing the launch position suggestion display 6820. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the game burden of the player who plays by selecting the necessary upper part from the display of the third symbol display device 81.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are views exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 58A shows a display screen that is switched from the state shown in FIG. 56A when the passage of a ball is detected at the through gates 66 and 67 before the end of the ending effect.

Further, in FIG. 58 (b), when time has passed from the display of FIG. 58 (a) and the launch suggestion display 6811 is displayed, the timing at which the right tip of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812. The display in is illustrated. That is, the arrangement of the right tip portion of the time display 811 in FIG. 58B is the same as the arrangement of the right tip portion of the time display 811 in FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the player shoots the ball from the state displayed in FIG. 56 (a) without operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45), before the end of the ending effect. When the passage of the ball is detected by the through gates 66 and 67, the direction control unit display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 display a game stop suggestion to encourage the player to stop firing the ball. It can be switched to 6831.

In the present embodiment, as the game stop suggestion display 6831, an illustration imitating a barrier installed at a railroad crossing, a still image in a state where the barrier is down is displayed, and "Stop" is displayed. The comment is displayed. As a result, the player can be urged to stop firing the balls, so that the number of balls fired before the end of the ending effect can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when time has passed from the state in which the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is used to prompt the player to prepare for launching the ball. Can be switched to.

In the present embodiment, as the game preparation suggestion display 6841, an illustration imitating a barrier installed at a railroad crossing, a still image in a state where the barrier is raised is displayed, and "beginning" is displayed. The comment is displayed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the period for stopping the firing of the ball has ended, and the player can be urged to prepare for launching the ball.

In the present embodiment, the firing time display 6811 (see FIG. 56B) is not displayed when the player does not operate the frame button 22, but the timing for switching from the game stop suggestion display 6831 to the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is , The timing at which the right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 coincides with that.

Therefore, the same benefit as the benefit obtained by operating the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 56 (a) (that is, the benefit of being able to grasp the appropriate launch timing of the sphere by visually recognizing the launch time display 6811) is obtained. , Can be obtained when a sphere is detected at the through gates 66 and 67 before the end of the ending effect.

Thereby, for example, when the frame button 22 is not operated due to a failure of the frame button 22, it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the profit obtained by the player. That is, since the launch position suggestion display 6820 (see FIG. 56A) is not displayed because the frame button 22 is not operated, the player can grasp an appropriate ball launch timing. Even if the player starts firing the ball even before the end of the ending effect, the game stop suggestion display 6831 or the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is displayed so that the player can see the ball. The launch can be stopped or the player can be prepared to launch the ball at the right time.

The modes of the game stop suggestion display 6831 and the game preparation suggestion display 6841 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of the illustration of the breaker, the illustration of the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 10 with a cross mark may be displayed. For example, it may be configured as a moving image instead of a still image. For example, it may be configured to display the entire display screen instead of a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The contents of the caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are not limited to the contents shown in FIG. 58, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the content may correspond to the launch of a ball. That is, by displaying an illustration imitating the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) and adding a counterclockwise arrow to the handle 51, it is suggested to stop the firing of the sphere, or the clock on the handle 51. By adding a counterclockwise arrow, it may be suggested that the ball launch start timing. In addition, a comment (such as "full tank" or "one empty") corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol may be displayed.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the direction operation unit display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although the case where the intensity of the light amount and the volume can be adjusted can be adjusted, in the situation suggestion display 7821 according to the seventh embodiment, the amount of light currently being executed and the setting of the amount of light and the volume set by the player Designed to display comments about volume settings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 59 (a), 59 (b), and 60 are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the seventh embodiment. 59 (a) and 60 show display screens for different jackpot games at the same timing (the position of the right tip of the time display 811 is the same) as the ending effect, and FIG. 59 (b) shows FIG. 59 (b). The display screen after the lapse of time from the state shown in a) is shown.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) is operated according to the frame button display 813 (see FIG. 48 (b)) in the ending effect, the third symbol display device 81 The direction operation unit display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen, and the situation suggestion display 7821 is displayed above the display screen.

The situation suggestion display 7821 is designed to display various comments, but in FIG. 59 (a), it is described as "cancel", and the change of the light amount and volume setting is initialized (maximum). (Returned to value) suggests.

That is, in the present embodiment, the setting of the amount of light and the volume is initialized (returned to the maximum value) by the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) when a predetermined time elapses from the execution of the setting change. It is set, and in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed, the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821.

As a result, for example, the left switch and the lower switch (the switch operated to change the volume and the amount of light to the side of weakening) of the direction operation unit 45 (see FIG. 45) function, but the right switch and the upper switch (the volume and the amount of light) (volume and the amount of light). When the switch) that is operated to change to the side that strengthens is out of order, once the amount of light and volume are lowered to the minimum, the amount of light and volume cannot be increased at all even if the player changes after that. Can be avoided.

By visually recognizing that the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821, the player can grasp that the change of the light amount and the volume setting has been initialized (returned to the maximum value). If the player who changed the light intensity and volume settings immediately before and the player who is currently playing the game are the same, the light intensity and volume settings are set to the state immediately before initialization (returned to the maximum value). You will want to bring it back.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed, the setting of the amount of light in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) is displayed on a vertical scale. The past volume display 7818 is left as the past light intensity display 7817 in 817 (corresponding to the part shown in light coating), and the volume setting in the state immediately before its initialization (returned to the maximum value) is displayed on the horizontal scale display 818. It is left as (corresponding to the part shown in light coating).

Therefore, the player operates the direction operation unit 45 with the past light amount display 7817 as a mark to change the light amount setting, and operates the direction operation unit 45 with the past volume display 7818 as a mark to change the volume setting. As a result, the light intensity and volume settings can be easily restored to the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value).

As described above, the past light amount display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the initialization of the light amount and the volume is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). On the other hand, if the timing is missed, the display is set to disappear, and the time and effort for changing the light amount and volume settings increases (the difficulty level increases).

As a result, the player can be directed to operate the direction operation unit 45 at the timing when the past light amount display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed, so that the player can be directed to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. You can improve your attention.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the player operates the direction control unit 45 to return the light amount and volume settings to the state immediately before the initialization (return to the maximum value), the situation suggestion display is displayed. The comment "Cancel" of 7821 is switched to the comment "Return completed".

By visually recognizing that the comment "Return completed" was displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821, the player was able to return the light amount and volume settings to the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value). Can be grasped. As a result, since the setting can be changed, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) does not initialize the light amount and volume (return to the maximum value) until the specified time elapses.

In the display shown in FIG. 60, the comment "automatic continuation" is displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821, and the volume and light amount settings are maintained in the state set by the player. Therefore, since the player does not need to change the setting of the volume and the amount of light, he / she can pay attention to the movement of the time display 811 and concentrate on aiming at the firing timing of the ball.

In this way, the content of the situation suggestion display 7821 in the ending effect is changed, and depending on the content, the player is configured to be able to operate the direction operation unit 45 for changing the setting of the light amount and the volume. , It is possible to improve the player's attention to the ending effect.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the first embodiment, the case where the frame button display 813 is always displayed and the frame button 22 can be operated during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect has been described, but the frame button display 8813 in the eighth embodiment has been described. , The card forgetting prevention display effect is displayed as an entity for a further limited period during execution, and the frame button 22 can be operated. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), and 62 are diagrams illustrating in chronological order the display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect of the eighth embodiment. In FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b) and 62, the frame button display 8813 is shown by an imaginary line when it is displayed semi-transparently, and by a solid line when it is displayed as an entity. Will be done.

When the card forgetting prevention display effect is started in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61A, in addition to displaying the specific display 810 in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of specific displays 810 are displayed. The semi-transparent frame button display 8813 is displayed so as to be scattered near the edge of the display screen. The frame button display 8813 moves toward the center of the display screen with the passage of time.

When the semi-transparent frame button display 8813 reaches the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and is united, the frame button display 8813 is materialized as shown in FIG. 61 (b). It is controlled so that the input of the frame button 22 is valid in the state where the frame button display 8813 is materialized, and when the input of the frame button 22 is effectively detected, the operation is valid on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Display 8813a (comment "Gооd" in this embodiment) is displayed, and then the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a) described in the first embodiment. To do.

When the player wants to execute the operation of the frame button 22 to shift the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the timing at which the frame button display 8813 is materialized is set. Therefore, the player visually follows the moving frame button display 8813.

Since the specific display 810 is displayed on the movement path of the frame button display 8813, it is possible to make the specific display 810 enter the field of view of the player who follows the frame button display 8813 with his / her eyes. Further, by superimposing the position where the frame button display 8813 is materialized on the position where the specific display 810 is displayed, the player can be directed to pay attention to the specific display 810 displayed behind the frame button display 8813. ..

In the first place, during the period from the start of the card forgetting prevention display effect to the materialization of the frame button display 8813, the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the card forgetting prevention is prevented. Compared with the case where the frame button 22 can be operated immediately after the start of the display effect and the specific display 810 is immediately moved to the corner of the display screen, the specific display 810 can be easily entered into the player's field of view.

When the frame button 22 is not operated while the frame button display 8813 is materialized, it is displayed semitransparently from the center position of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 toward the outside as shown in FIG. 62. The frame button display 8813 moves.

In the state shown in FIG. 62, the input of the frame button 22 is controlled to be invalid, and even if the frame button 22 is input, the operation invalid display 8813b (the present embodiment) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, only the comment (comment "Miss") is displayed, the display screen is not shifted to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), and the specific display 810 is arranged in the center of the display screen. Be maintained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by limiting the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the following preferable effects can be produced.

That is, when the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes from the translucent display to the display as an entity to indicate the timing at which the frame button 22 can be operated, the specific display is performed until the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes. Since the 810 is arranged in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and is configured to be easily in the player's field of view, it is possible to improve the attention to the specific display 810.

Further, the frame button display 8813 is switched from the actual display to the semi-transparent display in the middle of the card forgetting prevention display effect, so that the frame button 22 is operated and the display screen is shown in FIG. 49 (a). It is possible to prevent the period from the timing of transition to the end of the card forgetting prevention display effect period to become too short.

As a result, even though the player effectively operated the frame button 22, it was not possible to secure sufficient time to change the light amount and volume setting before the card forgetting prevention display effect was completed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the volume and volume cannot be changed to the desired setting.

Therefore, a player who has experienced that the light amount and volume settings could not be changed to a desired state even if the frame button 22 is operated may underestimate the value of the operation of the frame button 22. You can avoid doing it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation for the operation of the frame button 22 (not only the operation during the ending effect but also the operation during the game) is reduced.

By attaching a musical note mark or a light bulb mark to the frame button display 8813, it is possible to suggest an object that can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. In this case, when the player wants to adjust the volume, if a musical note mark is attached, the attention to the frame button display 8813 can be improved, and a light bulb mark is attached. If so, attention can be distracted from the frame button display 8813.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the time change of the frame button display 8813, the time change of the effectiveness of the operation of the frame button 22, and the operation of the frame button 22 in the card forgetting prevention display effect. In FIG. 63, as an example, the period of the card forgetting prevention display effect is divided into three equal parts, and the first period T81 (see FIG. 61 (a)) dotted with semi-transparent frame button displays 8813 and the frame button display. It is assigned to the second period T82 (see FIG. 61 (b)) in which 8813 is united and materialized, and the third period T83 (see FIG. 62) which becomes translucent again and is dotted with frame button displays 8813. The case is illustrated.

Unlike the first embodiment in which the frame button 22 can be operated at any time during the period of the card forgetting prevention display effect, in the present embodiment, the operation of the frame button 22 is effective only in the second period T82. When the frame button 22 is operated in the second period T82, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), and the light amount and volume settings can be changed. On the other hand, no matter how much the frame button 22 is operated in the first period T81 or the third period T83, it is controlled so that the setting of the light amount and the volume cannot be changed.

In FIG. 63, the case where the respective periods T81, T82, and T83 are the same is shown, but the lengths of the respective periods T81, T82, and T83 can be changed in various modes depending on the purpose. Hereinafter, an example of the effect that can be expected by the change in the length of the first period 81 or the change in the length of the third period T83 will be described.

For example, by setting the first period T81 to be shorter, the transition to the second period T82 in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective is accelerated. Therefore, the maximum length of the period that can be spent for changing the light amount and volume settings can be increased.

The setting for shortening the first period T81 may be effective, for example, in the ending effect in the jackpot game of the first hit (the first jackpot of the consecutive villa). There are some players who are not interested in the sound in the normal state but want to hear the specific song because a specific song may be played during the time saving state, the probability change state, or the jackpot game.

Even if such a player plays a game with the volume turned down in the normal state, the volume is turned up to the extent that a specific song can be heard when shifting from the normal state to the jackpot game state and then to the time saving state or the probabilistic state. I want to raise it.

Therefore, in particular, in the ending effect of the jackpot game of the first hit, by increasing the maximum length of the period that can be spent for changing the setting of the amount of light and the volume, the normal state is changed to the jackpot game state, and then the time is shortened or the probability is changed. It becomes easy to change the volume setting at an appropriate timing of the transition, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player who wants to listen to the specific song.

Further, for example, by setting the first period T81 to be longer, the transition to the second period T82 in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective is delayed, while the specific display 810 displays the display of the third symbol display device 81. The period displayed in the center of the screen can be maintained for a long time.

The setting of lengthening the first period T81 may be effective, for example, in the ending effect of the jackpot game in the consecutive villas. It is often sufficient to change the volume and light intensity settings at the time of the first hit, and it is unlikely that you will want to change the volume and light intensity settings during the consecutive villas, so the second period T82 Even if the maximum length of the period that can be spent for changing the volume and light amount settings is shortened due to the slow transition, the disadvantage to the player is small.

On the other hand, as the number of consecutive villas continues, the degree of excitement of the player increases, so there is a high possibility that the player will forget to return the card or the like inserted in the card unit when the game is completed. On the other hand, when the first period T81 is set to be long, the period in which the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time during the card forgetting prevention display effect. It is possible to encourage the person to pay attention to the return of the card or the like.

Further, for example, by setting the second period T82 to be shorter, it is possible to make it difficult for the frame button 22 to be operated to shift to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a). In this case, in addition to being able to guide the player's line of sight to the specific display 810 with the moving frame button display 8813 (see FIG. 61A), the operation in the state where the plurality of frame button displays 8813 are combined fails. It can be directed, and the possibility of shifting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 62 can be increased.

As a result, the specific display 810 can be maintained in the center of the display screen during the card forgetting prevention display effect, and the frame button display 8813 moves to guide the player's line of sight to the specific display 810. You can expect the effect. Therefore, the impression of the specific display 810 can be strongly left to the player as compared with the case where the frame button display 8813 is not provided.

Further, for example, by setting the second period T82 to be longer, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective can be maintained for a long time, so that the operation opportunity of the frame button 22 can be secured.

Further, for example, by setting the third period T83 to be shorter, the T82 can be relatively lengthened, and the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective can be maintained for a long time. Operation opportunities can be secured.

Further, for example, by setting the third period T83 to be longer, the card forgetting prevention display effect after shifting to the state shown in FIG. 49 (a) by operating the frame button 22 in the second period T82 Since the remaining period of the above can be secured for a long time, it is possible to easily avoid changing the setting of the amount of light and the volume halfway.

The lengths of T81, T82, and T83 for each period may be changed for reasons other than those described above. For example, when there is a big hit on the reserved ball for which the lottery of the first symbol has already been completed during the big hit game, the first period T81 is extremely shortened, and the second period T82 is controlled to be longer by that amount. You can do it.

In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be shown to the player as if it was started from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b) without going through the state shown in FIG. 61 (a), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be given. By letting the player know that there is a big hit on the reserved ball due to this discomfort, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect, so the card forgetting prevention display It is possible to improve the attention to the production. As a result, the player can be made aware of the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit, and the occurrence of a situation in which the player actually forgets the card or the like can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, by controlling the operation of the winning unit 400 in a plurality of modes, the ball passing through the inside of the winning unit 400 is guided to the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 64b. By utilizing the fact that it is possible to switch between the states guided by, the small hit game is set to occur frequently (occurs by the fluctuation of the special symbol almost every time) as the game state after the big hit game. A special probability change state in which a large amount of prize balls can be paid out even before the game shifts to the big hit game by winning a ball in the specific prize opening 65a opened in the game, and a probability change in which the small hit game does not occur frequently. The case where the state can be configured has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is not set so that small hit games occur frequently (the specific winning opening 65a is not always required), and the winning opening for receiving the lottery of the special symbol 1 using the winning unit 400 ( It is possible to switch between a state where it is easy to guide the ball to the side (corresponding to the third winning opening 64b) and a state where it is easy to guide the ball to the winning opening (corresponding to the second winning opening 640) side for receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2. May be said.

In this case, in the gaming state that is shifted after the jackpot game is completed, the game has a common game mode in which a ball is fired toward the winning unit 400, and the jackpot type that is expected when a jackpot is won is distributed. It is possible to configure a pachinko machine that can change.

In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 has a first operation pattern in which it is difficult to guide the ball to both the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b, or a first operation pattern in which it is easy to guide the ball to the third winning opening 64b. Although the case where the electric accessory 640a is configured to be operable by the operation pattern of 2 or the third operation pattern in which the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be movable in an operation pattern that facilitates guiding the ball to both the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b.

As a means for realizing this, for example, the operation time t3b of the reference operation pattern RP3 in the third operation pattern is set to 1.0 second, and the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state for the remaining 1.0 second. In this case, the ball picked up by the tip portion 451 during the waiting time t3a may be guided to the second winning opening 640 or may be guided to the third winning opening 64b.

In the first embodiment, when the solenoid SOL41 is driven while the ball is on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 arranged at the forward position in the winning unit 400, the ball is on the tip 451. Although the case where the ball is formed so as to be able to pass through the ball passing opening 414 in a form of being pushed into the upper surface of the tip portion 451 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip portion 451 and the upper edge of the sphere passage opening 414 may be designed to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

That is, the upper surface of the tip portion 451 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the front, but the displacement direction of the slide member 450 is in the front-rear direction, so that the upper surface of the tip portion 451 and the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414. The dimension between and is shorter when the slide member 450 is placed in the retracted position than when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position.

Utilizing this, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position, the ball can pass through the ball passage opening 414, while the tip portion when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position. The ball on the 451 is designed so that the ball is caught on the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414 so that the slide member 450 is on the tip 451 when it is displaced from the forward position to the backward position. It is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the sphere passage opening 414. As a result, the probability of the ball entering the ball passing opening 414 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, in the winning unit 400, the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 are formed at a height sufficient to block the passage of the ball in the left-right direction, and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion. The case where the introduction of the sphere from the 453 to the central flow path 431 side is limited to the mode of passing through the left opening LT or the right opening RT arranged behind the left wall portion 432 or the right wall portion 433 has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the vertical heights of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed to be low so that the ball can pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433.

Further, for example, the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion take advantage of the fact that the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450 differs depending on whether the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position or the backward position. The height of 433 is used to prevent the ball from passing above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 when the slide member 450 is arranged in the forward position (when the vertical position of the upper surface is low). Sufficient (for example, the upper and lower positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 are designed to be higher than the upper and lower positions of the upper surface of the slide member 450), while the slide member 450 is in the retracted position. When arranged in (when the vertical dimension of the upper surface is high), it is permissible for the sphere to pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 (the sphere is allowed to pass, for example, the slide member 450. The upper and lower positions of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed to be lower than the upper and lower positions of the upper surface of the above.

In this case, as a variation of the flow path of the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and flows down to the central flow path 431 side, the left opening LT or the left opening LT arranged behind the left wall portion 432 or the right wall portion 433. In addition to the flow path passing through the right opening RT, a flow path passing above the left wall portion 432 or the right wall portion 433 in a state where the slide member 450 is arranged at the retracted position can be configured.

Further, the relationship between the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450 and the vertical position of the upper ends of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be different on the left and right. For example, the ball may be configured to restrict the passage of the sphere above the right wall 433 while allowing the sphere to pass above the left wall 432, or the sphere may pass above the right wall 433. It may be configured to limit the passage of the sphere over the upper side of the right wall portion 432 in a state where it is allowed to do so.

In this case, the flow path of the sphere guided by the slide member 450 can be significantly different depending on whether the sphere flows down the left side or the sphere flows down the right side.

In the first embodiment, the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 and the plate-shaped portion 471 of the tilting member 470 are provided as a structure for picking up the ball, and the tip portion 451 is left and right outside and upper side of the plate-shaped portion 471 in a front view. Although the case where it is arranged in is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bifurcated structure of the slide member 450 may be abandoned so that the portion corresponding to the tip portion 451 is arranged directly above the plate-shaped portion 471.

In this case, the tip portion 451 is provided with a fixed regulating plate that regulates the passage of the sphere at a position between the tip portion 451 and the plate-shaped portion 471 in the region between the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16. It is possible to avoid a winning mode in which the unpicked ball is picked up by the plate-shaped portion 471.

As a result, the horizontal dimension of the winning unit 400 can be reduced. Further, by using only one tip portion 451, it is possible to prevent the merging of balls in the path in the winning unit 400, so that the degree of freedom in designing the winning unit 400 can be improved (simplification of the design). Can be done).

In the first embodiment, the ceiling surface 447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member 450 is formed so as to extend in the horizontal direction, and the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 arranged on the upper side of the central flow path 431 is formed. The case where the ceiling is ascended toward the front side has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the ceiling surface 447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that inclines downward toward the rear. In this case, it is possible to prevent the flowing ball from fluttering because the flow area (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450 becomes too large. ..

For example, the ceiling surface 447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that ascends and inclines toward the rear. In this case, a large flow area (area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450 can be secured, so that when the slide member 450 is displaced rearward. Even if the ball on the upper surface of the slide member 450 is pushed backward and the density of the ball at the rear position of the slide member 450 becomes high, there is a possibility that the ball may be clogged on the upper side of the slide member 450. Can be lowered.

For example, the ceiling component 444 arranged above the central flow path 431 may be configured to incline downward toward the front side, or may be configured to extend in the horizontal direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the sphere in the flow from fluttering because the flow area (area through which the sphere can pass) of the sphere on the downstream side of the central flow path 431 becomes too large.

In the first embodiment, the left-right width of the ball passing opening 414 through which the ball picked up by the slide member 450 passes and the central opening 413 through which the ball picked up by the tilting member 470 passes is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. The case where it is considered to be a long time has been explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right widths of the sphere passage opening 414 and the central opening 413 are designed to be slightly longer than a plurality of times (for example, twice) the diameter of the sphere, and the left guide plate portion 452 of the slide member 450 is combined. The left and right widths of the right guide plate portion 453, the central flow path 431, and the tilting member 470 may be designed to have the same left and right widths. In this case, the number of balls that can be picked up by the slide member 450 or the tilting member 470 at one time can be increased, so that the winning efficiency can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left-right width of the ball passing opening 414 and the left-right width of the central opening 413 are matched has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left-right width of the sphere passage opening 414 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the left-right width of the central opening 413 may be designed to be slightly longer than a plurality of times the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the left-right width of the central flow path 431 and the left-right width of the tilting member 470 may be designed in the same manner as the left-right width of the central opening 413.

In this case, since the spheres can flow down side by side in the region downstream from the central flow path 431, even when the spheres pass through the pair of left and right sphere passage openings 414 at the same time, the central flow path 431 It is possible to easily avoid the situation where the balls merge and the flow resistance increases.

Further, for example, the left-right width of the sphere passage opening 414 is designed to be slightly longer than a plurality of times the diameter of the sphere, and the left-right width of the central opening 413 is designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. Alternatively, the left-right width of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450, the left guide plate portion 452, and the right guide plate portion 453 may be designed in the same manner as the left-right width of the ball passage opening 414.

In this case, under the condition that the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked with each other, the first ball entry efficiency (efficiency at which the ball is picked up by the slide member 450) on the most upstream side (entrance side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400. It is possible to reduce the second ball entry efficiency (the efficiency at which the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470) on the most downstream side (exit side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400 than the first ball entry efficiency. ..

As a result, the probability that the ball is actually picked up by the tilting member 470 (second ball) by making the player appear that the apparent ball entry efficiency (first ball entry efficiency) of entering the entrance of the winning unit 400 is high. The ball entry efficiency) can be configured to be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the impression of the player's entry efficiency into the winning unit 400, and to encourage the player to continue the game.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 of the slide member 450 and the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion 453 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt angle of the right guide plate portion 453 may be larger than the tilt angle of the left guide plate portion 452, or the tilt angle of the left guide plate portion 452 may be larger than the tilt angle of the right guide plate portion 453. Is also good.

In particular, in the latter case, the difference in the flow time of the sphere due to the difference in the front-rear length of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 can be compensated by the flow speed of the sphere, so that the left and right tip portions 451 When the balls are received at the same time, the timing at which the balls reach the central flow path 431 can be easily adjusted.

In the former case, on the contrary, the flow speed of the ball promotes the difference in the flow time of the ball due to the difference in the front-rear length of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. When the portions 451 receive the spheres at the same time, the timing at which the spheres reach the central flow path 431 can be easily changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide member 450 rolls the ball not only in the tip portion 451 that receives the ball from the game area but also in the rear flow path thereof has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, a sphere that comes into contact with a sphere only at the tip portion 451 and flows to the downstream side of the tip portion 451 is the upper surface of a fixed plate portion (non-displaceable portion) that covers the left guide plate portion 452, the right guide plate portion 453, and the like from above. You may make it roll. In this case, the range in which the sphere is accelerated or decelerated due to the displacement of the slide member 450 can be narrowed.

Further, in this case, the configuration and the operation mode of the tip portion 451 may be changed to the operation mode of tilting forward (the operation mode exemplified by the tilting member 470). That is, in the non-excited state, the open position described by the tilting member 470 may be set, and in the excited state, the closed position may be set as described by the tilting member 470.

In the first embodiment described above, in the winning unit 400, the case where the ball picked up by the tip portion 451 rolls on the fixed bottom surface portion 431a in the path until it reaches the tilting member 470 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the bottom surface portion 431a may be configured to operate in conjunction with the operation of the slide member 450. In this case, even if the ball is clogged in the internal flow path of the winning unit 400, the ball can be loosened and the ball clogging can be eliminated because the operation occurs in the entire internal flow path. The operation of the bottom surface portion 431a may be one that operates in the opposite direction of the slide member 450, or one that operates in the same direction by being integrally configured with the slide member 450.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fixed bottom surface portion 431a is formed as an inclined surface that linearly rolls the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface portion 431a may be curved so that the flow direction of the sphere is curved so that the change in the flow speed of the sphere becomes remarkable, or the range in which the sphere falls during the flow may be set. It may be configured to have the ball so that the flow mode varies when the ball bounces, or the flow path is repeatedly bent so that the ball meanders and flows down to lengthen the time until the ball passes. good.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball passing opening 414 is a simple opening in the winning unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a ball may be provided in the ball passage opening 414 so that the ball entering the ball passage opening 414 can be detected. In this case, when the ball enters the ball passing opening 414, the ball has passed through the ball passing opening 414 to the player by notifying the player with the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Can be noticed, and the attention of the winning unit 400 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball picked up by the tip portion 451 is always guided to the tilting member 470 side in the winning unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge opening is formed in the internal flow path, and some balls are discharged through the discharge opening, so that only a part of the balls picked up by the tip portion 451 is guided to the tilting member 470. It may be configured so that there is no such thing. In this case, the slide member 450 may be configured to function as a member for opening and closing the discharge opening.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450 are formed in a plate shape having the same inclination in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the inclination may be changed in the middle, or the upper surface may be formed in a stepped shape. In this case, the magnitude of the load received by the sphere when the slide member 450 is displaced rearward can be changed depending on the arrangement of the sphere on the slide member 450 (for example, when the sphere is formed in a staircase shape, a step It can be different depending on whether the sphere is placed near the step and receives the load from the side of the step, or the sphere is placed away from the step and receives the load by sliding with the upper surface of the step).

For example, the angle of inclination of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the upstream side (front side) with respect to the horizontal plane is compared with the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the downstream side (rear side) with respect to the horizontal plane. When the inclination angle is made small, the load received by the sphere due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the upstream side can be made larger than the load received by the sphere due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the downstream side. As a result, the distance between the plurality of spheres arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side on the slide member 450 can be narrowed (contracted or made dense) by the displacement of the slide member 450.

Further, for example, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the downstream side (rear side) are compared with the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the upstream side (front side) with respect to the horizontal plane. When forming a large inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane, the load received by the sphere due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the upstream side may be smaller than the load received by the sphere due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the downstream side. it can. As a result, the distance between the plurality of spheres arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side on the slide member 450 can be widened (expanded or sparse) by the displacement of the slide member 450.

Further, for example, the size of the inclination of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 with respect to the horizontal plane may be changed a plurality of times along the flow path. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the spheres, it is possible to cause both the case where the distance between the spheres is shortened due to the displacement of the slide member 450 and the case where the distance between the spheres is widened.

Further, for example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 may be different from the inclination angle of the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 452. That is, even if the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 is formed in a plate shape having the same inclination with respect to the horizontal plane in the front-rear direction, the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 453 is formed so that the inclination with respect to the horizontal plane changes in the middle. good. In this case, the mode of the load received by the sphere due to the displacement of the slide member 450 can be different depending on whether the sphere is arranged on the left guide plate portion 452 or the sphere is arranged on the right guide plate portion 452. ..

In the first embodiment, the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked with each other by interposing the transmission member 480 between them, and a problem such as ball biting occurs on the other side of the slide member 450 or the tilting member 470. I explained the case where it affects the other operation, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, at a position (interval position) between the front side of the rotating tip portion, which is the portion of the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 and is arranged to face the slide member 450, and the central fixing portion 454 of the slide member 450. A coil spring that can be expanded and contracted in the front-rear direction is interposed. Normally, the slide member 450 is pressed against the second member 485 side by the urging force of the coil spring so that the second member 485 and the slide member 450 are interlocked with each other, while the front end and the front design of the slide member 450 are formed. When a ball is sandwiched (bitten) between the member 420 and the member 420, the coil spring is configured to be covered by contracting the coil spring by the amount that the forward displacement of the slide member 450 is hindered. The second member 485 can be tilted forward even if the slide member 450 is not arranged in the forward position.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the first member 481 from being hindered by the second member 485, so that the operation of the tilting member 470 is stopped in the middle due to the ball biting generated on the slide member 450 side. It can be easily avoided.

In this way, even when a plurality of driving force transmission paths are provided by using the transmission member 480, a member such as a coil spring (cushioning material or the like may be used) is interposed in one transmission path. It is possible to prevent a defect caused by one transmission path from being transmitted to another transmission path.

In the first embodiment, the case where the locking protrusion 487 is pushed down by the lower plate portion 482b when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done.

For example, the formation of the locking protrusion 487 may be omitted. In the excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the lower plate portion 482b is in contact with the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is secured between the upper plate portion 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486. ..

The load in the rotation direction due to the own weight of the second member 485 is less than the static friction between the slide member 450 and the middle member 430 that abuts on the second member 485 at the outer end in the radial direction of rotation, and the second member It is prevented that the 485 is displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight. That is, even if the contact between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 is released, the posture of the second member 485 is maintained.

Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state, the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position until the eccentric protrusion 486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion 482a, and only the tilting member 470 rises up. Operate. That is, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member 470. In this case, the operation start timing of the slide member 450 and the operation start timing of the tilting member 470 will be different from each other.

That is, only the tilting member 470 operates from the start of operation to the intermediate position, and the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 operate from the intermediate position. In the process of lowering the first member 481, after the upper plate portion 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact with each other, the eccentric protrusion 486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion 482a, and the second member 485 is moved to the rotating shaft portion 485a. Rotates in the forward rotation direction around. The operation end timing is almost the same for the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470.

In this case, even if a sphere is caught between the slide member 450 and the pre-design member 420 in the switching operation from the excited state to the non-excited state and the displacement of the slide member 450 can be suppressed, the slide member 450 Since the raising operation of the tilting member 470 is started prior to the displacement of the tilting member 470, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 470 from being suppressed.

As a result, in conjunction with the suppression of the displacement of the slide member 450, the rising operation of the tilting member 470 is delayed, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 at an unexpected timing.

The load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the second member 485 is less than the static friction between the slide member 450 and the middle member 430 that are brought into contact with the second member 485 at the outer end in the radial direction of rotation. An example is taken in which the two members 485 are prevented from being displaced in the forward rotation direction by their own weight, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity of the second member 485 may be designed to be closer to the tilted tip side so that the second member 485 can be displaced in the forward rotation direction by its own weight.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked by the driving force of a single solenoid SOL41 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driving device for driving the slide member 450 and the driving device for driving the tilting member 470 may be separately configured so as to be non-interlocking and operable.

In this case, for example, the tilting member 470 is released after about 3 seconds have passed since the slide member 450 was placed in the retracted position (a sufficient time has passed for the ball flowing into the winning unit 400 to pass through). An actuation pattern may be added such that the tilt member 470 is placed in the closed position when the slide member 450 is subsequently placed in the forward position so that it is displaced to the position. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being picked up by the tilting member 470.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tip portion 451 makes it difficult to pick up the ball even when the ball is sandwiched when the tilting member 470 is closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the first place, the solenoid SOL41 may be set to be driven so that the tilting member 470 does not close at the timing when the ball can reach the tilting member 470. In this case, the tilting member 470 can be closed smoothly.

Further, at the timing when the ball can reach the tilting member 470, the tilting member 470 may be set to drive the solenoid SOL41 so that only the opening operation occurs. In this case, since the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of opening the tilting member 470, it is possible to assist the opening of the tilting member 470, and the tilting member 470 slides through the first member 481 and the second member 485. By transmitting the load to the member 450, the operation of the slide member 450 toward the retracted position can be smoothly performed.

In the first embodiment, the flow path of the ball flowing down the winning unit 400 is switched by repeatedly executing the operation patterns RP1 to RP3 set from the standby times t1a to t3a and the operation times t1b to t3b. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the operation time may be set as the reference operation pattern, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be set instead of the standby time.

For example, when the operation time is set to 3.9 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to 0.1 seconds, that 0.1 second is maintained in the non-excited state. Since it takes time, as a result, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to the operation in the first operation pattern.

Further, for example, when the operation time is set to 0.2 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to 1.8 seconds, the 1.8 seconds is maintained in the non-excited state. As a result, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to the operation in the second operation pattern.

Further, for example, when the operation time is set to 2.0 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to 2.0 seconds, the 2.0 seconds is maintained in the non-excited state. As a result, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to the operation in the third operation pattern.

In the first embodiment, the nail KG1 is arranged between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b, and depending on the state of the nail KG1, the third ball that flows downward from the internal flow path of the winning unit 400. Although the case where the probability of entering the winning opening 64b is changed has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the switching device 5770 described in the fifth embodiment is arranged between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b, and the third winning opening 64b depends on the ball entering timing with respect to the operation of the switching device 5770. It may be the one that decides whether or not to enter the ball. In this case, the ball can be entered into the third winning opening 64b regardless of the state of the nail KG1.

Further, for example, a distribution device (for example, a seesaw mechanism) that introduces a ball between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b at a ratio of one in two (or N) to the third winning opening 64b side. ) May be arranged. In this case, regardless of the state of the nail KG1, one out of every two (or N) can be entered into the third winning opening 64b by the sorting device, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing down above the through gates 66 and 67 is configured to be guided to the through gates 66 and 67 by the nail KG1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a structure made of a resin material may be used for guiding the through gates 66 and 67 in place of the nail KG1 or in combination with the nail KG1. In this case, since the structure made of the resin material is less likely to change in state than the nail KG1, the guidance of the sphere to the through gates 66 and 67 can be stabilized.

Further, for example, by reducing the number of nails KG1 arranged or changing the arrangement position, all the balls flowing down above the through gates 66 and 67 do not pass through the through gates 66 and 67, but one. The sphere of the portion may be configured to deviate from the through gates 66 and 67 and flow down.

In the first embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be obtained by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, and the ball not picked up by the tilting member 470 enters the third winning opening 64b. The case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be obtained by doing so has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the allocation of special symbols that can be obtained by lottery is reversed (the lottery of special symbol 1 can be obtained by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, and the ball that is not picked up by the tilting member 470 is By entering the third winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained). In this case, if the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a after the end of the big hit is set as the second operation pattern in the case of the big hits A and a and the third operation pattern in the case of the big hits B, C, b and c, It is possible to maintain the same playability as that described in the first embodiment. Further, unlike the case described in the first embodiment, the small hit game is likely to occur in a state where the ball is likely to enter the third winning opening 64b, and the ball is easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball spilling from the third winning opening 64b is picked up by the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, for example, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained by entering the third winning opening 64b under the condition that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member 470. May be. In this case, the specific winning opening 65a may be arranged so as not to project outward in the left-right direction from the left and right outer ends of the winning unit 400.

When the electric accessory 640a is driven by the second operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip portion 451 and flowing down the inside of the winning unit 400 are discharged from the winning unit 400 to the third winning opening 64b side. Flow down. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is driven by the third operation pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip portion 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 are picked up by the tilting member 470, so that the first 3 It does not flow to the winning opening 64b side. Then, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged so as to receive the ball spilled from the third winning opening 64b among the balls discharged from the winning unit 400 and flowing down to the third winning opening 64b side, thereby providing new playability. Can be configured.

That is, regardless of whether the electric accessory 640a is driven by the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained. Therefore, opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a may occur frequently as a small hit game.

Here, when the electric accessory 640a is driven by the second operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip portion 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 flow down to the third winning opening 64b side. , Some percentage of them spills from the third winning opening 64b and enters the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player can receive a large amount of winning balls.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is driven by the third operation pattern, most of the balls do not face the specific winning opening 65a side (picked up by the tilting member 470), so that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is unlikely to occur, and the player cannot receive a large amount of prize balls.

In this way, regardless of whether the electric accessory 640a is driven by the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the player can win the lottery of the special symbol 2. The specific winning opening 65a opens and closes frequently, but when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (small hit game), the probability that the ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the difference in the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. It is possible to configure the playability of causing a case where a large amount of prize balls are obtained by entering the specific winning opening 65a at the time of occurrence) and a case where the ball is not.

In the first embodiment, as a profit obtained by the player by the ball flowing into the winning unit 400, when the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, the special symbol is not drawn and only the prize ball is paid out. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the third winning opening 64b, the special symbol 1 is drawn and the prize ball is set to be paid out, but this is not always the case. is not it. For example, when the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, the special symbol 1 is drawn and the prize ball is paid out, while when the ball passes through the third winning opening 64b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Instead, it may be set so that only the prize ball is paid out.

In this case, in the first operation pattern, the ball rarely passes through the opening 435a, so that the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1 increases by passing through the opening 435a in addition to the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64. To do.

In the second operation pattern, the ball is picked up by the tip portion 451 and passes through the front side of the tilting member 470 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a to facilitate winning in the third winning opening 64b, so that the ball flows into the winning unit 400. The lottery frequency of special symbols is not increased by the balls, and the prize balls are paid out more. In the winning unit 400, even when the sphere is opened so that the sphere can pass through the opening 435a, the passage of the sphere in the opening 435a is 1 in 10, so that the sphere is opened when the opening 435a has an operating time t2b. Rarely flows into the opening 435a side. Therefore, in the second operation pattern, the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1 hardly increases.

In the third operation pattern, the ball picked up by the tip portion 451 during the standby time t3a is easily picked up by the tilting member 470 during the operation time t3b, so that the lottery frequency of the special symbol 2 increases. Further, in the operation time t3b, since the ball can pass through the opening 435a on the front side of the tip portion 451, the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1 also increases.

Further, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435a is used as an out port (the opening where the prize ball is not paid out, the symbol lottery is not performed, and the ball is discharged from the game area), and is simply used as a sensor for counting the passage of the ball. You may. In this case, the opening 435a can measure the frequency with which the sphere passes through the opening 435a.

Further, the function of the second winning opening 640 and the function of the third winning opening 64b may be set in reverse. In this case, the operation pattern in the special probability change state may be set as the second operation pattern, and the operation pattern in the case of the probability change state may be set as the third operation pattern, and the ball enters the third winning opening 64b. It is possible to construct a pachinko machine in which a small hit is generated by a lottery to be performed and a ball deviating from the third winning opening 64b can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, in the state of the nail KG1 arranged directly above the third winning opening 64b, if the ball easily enters the third winning opening 64b, a small hit is likely to occur, but there are few balls deviating from the third winning opening 64b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings of the specific winning opening 65a from becoming excessive, but if it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 64b as the state of the nail KG1 arranged directly above the third winning opening 64b. Although small hits are unlikely to occur, many balls deviate from the third winning opening 64b, so once the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a large number of balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. That is, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine that balances whether or not it is easy to enter the third winning opening 64b (advantageous or disadvantageous) and whether or not it is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a (advantageous or disadvantageous).

In the first embodiment, the case where up to four balls can be stored between the storage plate portions 715 in the upper variable winning device 700 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage plate portion 715 may be formed in a shape in which only one sphere can be arranged between them. In this case, the spheres parked between the storage plate portions 715 are on the moving floor member 740, and the spheres that collide with the spheres can flow into the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. In this case, whether or not the sphere is in a state where it can easily pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be easily grasped by checking the presence or absence of the sphere between the storage plate portions 715. It is possible to reduce the playing burden on the player as compared with the case where it is necessary to count the number of balls in between.

In the first embodiment, the case where a plurality of detection sensors 750 are arranged on the left and right sides of the storage plate portion 715 in the upper variable winning device 700 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of detection sensors 750 may be one. Further, in the case of arranging one, one of the left and right of the storage plate portion 715 may be left and one of them may be excluded, or the detection sensor 750 may be displaced in front of and behind the storage plate portion 715. May be arranged.

When the detection sensor 750 is arranged on the front side of the storage plate portion 715, the ball passing through the opening 751 can be easily shown to the player. On the other hand, when the detection sensor 750 is arranged on the back side of the storage plate portion 715, it is possible to add an action that the sphere passing through the opening 751 is hidden by the sphere stored in the storage plate portion 715. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the unit 751.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the specified number of balls in the round game and the number of balls that can be stored between the storage plate portions 715 in the upper variable winning device 700 has been described as 10 to 4. The relationship of the number is arbitrarily determined, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of 10 to 10 balls, the opening 751 is opened when the upper variable winning device 700 has a winning number of balls exceeding the specified number (11 or more winnings, over winnings). It is possible to configure a pachinko machine through which. In this case, the joy of increasing the number of prize balls obtained in the round game compared to the case of staying in the specified number of balls, and the joy of becoming an advantageous state in the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game is completed. Can be given to the player at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the case where the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device for driving the moving floor member 740 may be provided separately from the driving device for driving the moving upper lid member 730.

As the operation pattern in this case, in addition to the operation pattern as described in the first embodiment, a wide variety of operation patterns can be configured. For example, when the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position, the moving floor member 740 can be arranged in the retracted position. In this case, since the ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 can be prevented from being stored at the position between the storage plate portions 715, the possibility that the ball enters the opening 751 can be reduced. ..

Further, for example, when the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position, the moving floor member 740 may be independently moved back and forth (repeatedly). In this case, if the period during which the moving floor member 740 is maintained in the retracted position is longer than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be discharged from the position between the storage plate portions 715, while the moving floor member 740 If the period during which the ball is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be held in a position between the storage plate portions 715.

Further, for example, when the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the advancing position, the moving floor member 740 can be arranged in the advancing position. In this case, even in a driving mode in which the moving upper lid member 730 repeatedly opens and closes during the round game, the state in which the balls are stored at the positions between the storage plate portions 715 can be maintained. Further, the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position by causing a time lag of several seconds from the arrangement of the moving upper lid member 730 to the displacement of the moving floor member 740 from the forward position to the backward position. When a large number of spheres enter together just before the sphere is formed, the spheres are moved from the position between the storage plate portions 715 until the timing when the spheres reach the opening 751 side and can pass through the opening 751. It can be prevented from being discharged.

In the first embodiment, the case where the upper variable winning device 700 is opened and closed in the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper variable winning device 700 may be configured to be opened and closed in the small hit game, and the detection sensor 750 may be configured as a detection sensor for enabling the big hit game to be executed by the ball passing through the opening 751. good.

Here, in the case where the total opening time of the upper variable winning device 700 in the small hit game is up to 1.8 seconds, if the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position, it is moved to the forward position every 0.12 seconds. In a state where the moving upper lid member 730 is repeatedly displaced back and forth according to the rule of arranging the moving upper lid member 730, the moving upper lid member 730 can be arranged in the retracted position up to 15 times (0.12 × 15 = 1.8).

When the moving floor member 740 is driven so that the balls arranged at the positions between the storage plate portions 715 are not discharged when the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position, the movable upper lid member 730 is arranged in the retracted position. The ball that has flowed down the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 can be stored at a position between the storage plate portions 715, and the ball can be easily entered into the opening 751. When the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other, it corresponds to a driving mode in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, when the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position and the moving floor member 740 is driven so that the ball arranged at the position between the storage plate portions 715 can be discharged, the moving upper lid member 730 is in the retracted position. The balls flowing down the front side of the moving upper lid member 730 in the state of being arranged in the storage plate portion 715 are discharged one after another from the position between the storage plate portions 715, and it is difficult for the balls to enter the opening 751. When the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other, it corresponds to a driving mode in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or longer.

In the small hit game, the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are opened and closed in a predetermined drive pattern. When the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other, a large number of balls are placed on the upper variable winning device during a period in which the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds. It is preferable to let the ball enter the 700, but it is difficult to distinguish the difference between 0.1 second and 0.3 second, for example.

Therefore, as a drive pattern for the small hit game, the timing at which the moving upper lid member 730 is moved forward by the period until the launched ball arrives rather than the period in which the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds. Then, the notification urging the ball to be launched toward the upper variable winning device 700 may be executed. If the ball is launched according to this notification, the ball can be stored at a position between the storage plate portions 715 and the ball can be easily entered into the opening 751. In this way, by notifying the appropriate timing of the launch of the ball, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of ball loss due to the firing of the ball at a timing other than the notification.

As a drive pattern for the small hit game, a period in which the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds is repeated twice, and the moving upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position during that period. When the period in which the state is repeated for 0.2 seconds or more is arranged, the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds is repeated for the first period. In the upper variable winning device, before the second period in which the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds when the ball does not enter the opening 751 in A notification may be executed to prompt the ball to be fired at the 700.

In this case, for example, even if the ball cannot be launched due to clogging of the ball launching device, the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for 0.2 seconds or longer for a longer period of time. If set (eg, in 15 seconds), it can increase the chances of repairing a blockage in the ball launcher in the meantime.

The timing of moving forward by the period until the launched ball arrives can be changed depending on the arrangement of the upper variable winning device 700. When it is arranged near the upper end of the game area as in the first embodiment, it takes 1 to 2 seconds, but when it is arranged at the lower right position of the game area, it is longer and the upstream side thereof. Depending on the length of the ball path (the path formed by the nail KG1 or the path formed by the resin member) in the above, the width is up to about 5 to 10 seconds.

Further, although the case where the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other is illustrated, the moving floor member 740 retracts when the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are configured to be driven independently. The above-mentioned notification may be performed aiming at a period in which the vehicle is repeatedly operated in a driving mode in which the period of being arranged at the position is less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, since the operation mode of the moving floor member 740 and the operation mode of the moving upper lid member 730 do not correspond to each other, the operation of the moving floor member 740 is performed by looking at the length of the period during which the moving upper lid member 730 is arranged in the forward position. It becomes difficult to associate with. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the above-mentioned notification.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is easily allowed to enter the opening 751 while the ball is stored between the pair of storage plate portions 715 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state changing means whose state is changed between an guided state in which the ball is guided into the opening 751 and a non-induced state in which the ball is not guided is arranged by the operation, and the operation of the state changing means is a pair of storage plate portions. It may be configured to be performed by the kinetic energy of the sphere discharged from the 715. In this case, it is possible to configure a game machine that can easily enter the opening 751 after the ball is discharged from between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball interferes with the entry of the ball into the pair of storage plate portions 715 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening / closing means for switching whether or not a ball can enter the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715 may be provided. In this case, even before the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is filled with the sphere, it is possible to configure the state in which the sphere cannot enter between the pair of storage plate portions 715 by the opening / closing means, and the sphere can be formed. It is possible to cause a situation of passing through the opening 751.

In this case, various aspects can be exemplified as the size of the opening / closing means, but by making the size in the front view smaller than the size of the sphere, the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the ball will flow into the opening 751.

Further, by making the size of the opening / closing means in front view larger than the size of the sphere, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the state of the opening / closing means, and it is determined whether or not the sphere flows into the opening 751. It can be made easier.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 700a is guided to the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715 with high probability has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the nail KG1 may be arranged between the storage plate portion 715 and the second specific winning opening 700a so as to be in contact with the ball.

This makes it easier for the ball colliding with the nail KG1 to induce an irregular prize passing through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 before the area between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is full. Can be done. In particular, irregular winning is likely to be induced when the flow is disturbed due to contact between the balls, such as when a plurality of balls pass through the second specific winning opening 700a in a row.

On the other hand, the nail KG1 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the balls stored in the pair of storage plate portions 715. As a result, the balls stored in the pair of storage plate portions 715 can be smoothly discharged.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary that the nails are arranged so as to be in contact with the sphere. For example, a projecting portion projecting from the foundation plate member 710 to the front side may be formed so that the projecting portion and the ball collide with each other. In this case, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the projecting portion can be improved as compared with the case of the nail KG1. For example, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball is guided to the opening 751 by forming it in a ridge shape that inclines downward as it approaches the opening 751 for a long time in the left-right direction.

Further, for example, a movable member is arranged on the front side of the base plate member 710 so that the ball colliding with the movable member can be guided to the opening 751 by being given momentum by the movable member. You can do it. The operation of the movable member may be a rotational operation, a sliding operation in a linear direction, or an operation by a combination thereof.

Further, for example, the second specific winning opening 700a is reciprocally displaced in the left-right direction, or the detection sensor 750 and the storage plate portion 715 are reciprocally displaced in the left-right direction, so that the second specific winning opening 700a is displaced depending on the timing. The passing sphere may flow to the opening 751 side of the detection sensor 750 instead of the pair of storage plate portions 715 side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is stored directly under the second specific winning opening 700a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage extending diagonally downward is formed on the downstream side of the second specific winning opening 700a, an opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage, and a ball is stored at an intermediate position of the ball passage. In a configuration in which the portion extends downward and the moving floor member 740 is arranged at the lower end of the ball storage portion, when the ball storage portion is full, the trailing ball rolls on the uppermost ball of the ball storage portion. Then, it may be configured so that the ball flows downstream through the ball passage and the ball passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

Further, the opening direction of the second specific winning opening 700a may be obliquely oriented, and the member that opens and closes the second specific winning opening 700a does not have to be slidably displaced but is rotationally displaced (for example,). It may be a tulip type opening / closing member composed of a pair of opening / closing members).

The direction of the ball passage extending diagonally downward to the downstream side of the second specific winning opening 700a is not limited at all. For example, it may be diagonally downward (diagonal toward the left-right side) or diagonally downward (diagonal toward the front-rear side) in the left-right direction.

In particular, in the case of an oblique downward movement toward the rear side, the opening 751 can be arranged on the front side of the ball storage portion. As a result, the ball passing through the opening 751 can be made more conspicuous than the ball stored in the ball storage portion, so that the player can easily see the passage of the ball in the opening 751.

In the first embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that need to be arranged between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is constant because the spheres are arranged at the upper end portions of the pair of storage plate portions 715 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical position of the upper surface of the moving floor member 740 changes in the vertical direction with the passage of time, and a plurality of plate members on which the ball at the lower end of the storage plate portion 715 is placed as the moving floor member 740 are arranged in the vertical direction. By changing the vertical position of the sphere arranged at the lowermost end among the plurality of spheres arranged between the pair of storage plate portions 715 by being installed and operating so as to be opened in order from the top. Since the spheres are arranged at the upper ends of the pair of storage plate portions 715, the number of spheres that need to be arranged between the pair of storage plate portions 715 may be changed.

Further, the storage plate portions 715 may be configured to be displaceable so that the left-right spacing of the pair of storage plate portions 715 changes. In this case, if the left-right spacing is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, even if four pieces are full, if the left-right spacing is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the sphere, 8 Since the tank is full, the difficulty level of passing the ball through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be changed.

Further, even when the tank is configured to be full with four pieces, the pair of storage plate parts is compared with the case where the left-right distance between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. When the left-right spacing of the 715 is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the sphere, the vertical length of the storage plate portion 715 can be halved, so the height dimension for storing the sphere can be increased. Can be shortened. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the storage plate portion 715 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the spheres arranged at the positions between the pair of storage plate portions 715 can be always visually recognized has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the visibility of the sphere at the position between the storage plate portions 715 can be reduced (for example, it is configured to be blindfolded by a movable member, or it is configured to be difficult to see by adjusting the amount of light). You can do it. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the ball will be full at the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

Although the case where the number of spheres stored at the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is four has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. It may be 0, 1, 3 or 5 or more. For example, by setting the number to eight (a number close to the specified number), the possibility that the sphere passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in the third special operation pattern can be greatly reduced.

In the first embodiment, the ball stored at a position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 and flowing down by arranging the moving floor member 740 at the retracted position is discharged from the game area through the ball pulling opening 782. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball flowing down by arranging the moving floor member 740 in the retracted position may be discharged to a croon having a plurality of holes.

In this Kroon, one of the plurality of holes is a specific hole having the same function as the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750, so that it cannot be confirmed that the ball passes through the opening 751 during the round game. Even if the moving floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position and the ball is swept from a position between the pair of storage plates 715, the player can still benefit from the ball entering the specific hole in the Kroon. Since there is a property, it is possible to improve the attention to the sphere flowed from the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

In the first embodiment, the case where the follow-up sphere of the stored sphere can pass through the opening 751 instead of the sphere stored at the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, an intermediate portion of the storage plate portion 715 is configured to be openable and closable, and a detection sensor 750 is also arranged on the downstream side of the open / close portion, so that the intermediate portion of the storage plate portion 715 is opened. One of the spheres stored between the pair of storage plate portions 715 may be flushed and may be configured to pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving device of the moving upper lid member 730 and the driving device of the moving floor member 740 are both solenoids 763, and the operation of the moving upper lid member 730 and the operation of the moving floor member 740 are interlocked with each other will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device different from the solenoid 763 may be provided for driving the moving floor member 740 so that the moving floor member 740 can operate independently of each other. In this case, in addition to the operation mode described in the first embodiment, when both the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are arranged in the forward position, or when both the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 are arranged. It is possible to configure the case where it is placed in the retracted position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the moving upper lid member 730 is formed in a plate shape that is inclined downward on both the left and right sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving upper lid member 730 may be formed in a flat plate shape that is inclined in one direction. Even in this case, the order of operations in which the moving floor member 740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the moving upper lid member 730 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position functions favorably, and the moving upper lid member 730 is displaced. Avoid a situation in which a ball that has flowed on the front side of the moving top lid member 730 at the same time as being displaced to the retracted position passes through the front side of the moving floor member 740 before the moving floor member 740 is placed in the forward position. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the moving floor member 740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the moving upper lid member 730 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position has been described, but the operation order is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operation order may be reversed.

Further, the case where the moving upper lid member 730 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the moving floor member 740 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving upper lid member 730 and the moving floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operation order may be reversed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front surface of the foundation plate member 710 arranged on the back surface side of the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 730 arranged at the forward position is a smooth surface has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of protrusions of the base plate member 710 from the front surface to the front side in a long ridge shape in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the rolling sphere (for example, the vertical direction) on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 730. The deceleration protrusions may be arranged along the flow direction of the sphere. Alternatively or in addition to this, the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 730 may be formed in a stepped shape to reduce the flow velocity of the sphere.

As a result, the flow speed of the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 730 can be reduced. Therefore, the moving upper lid member 730 can be opened once (displaced from the forward position to the backward position). Since the number of balls passing through the front side of the ball can be increased, the balls can be pulled out from between the pair of storage plate portions 715 when the moving upper lid member 730 is in the closed state (the state of being arranged in the forward position). Even in the configuration of the displacement, it is possible to easily collect the spheres between the pair of storage plate portions 715, and it is possible to increase the possibility that the spheres pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of storage plate portions 715, the moving floor member 740, and the detection sensor 750 are arranged on the downstream side of the moving upper lid member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the moving upper lid member 730 may be omitted so that the ball can always flow down to the side of the pair of storage plate portions 715, the moving floor member 740, and the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the moving upper lid member 730 is operated in the first round to enable the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, and in the second and subsequent round games, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. The case where the ball can be entered in the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is possible to arbitrarily set which round game is controlled so that the specific winning openings 65a and 700a can be entered.

For example, in the second and subsequent round games, the moving upper lid member 730 may be operated and controlled so that the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 700a. In this case, it is possible to configure the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a only in the small hit game (the moving upper lid member 730 is operated in the all-round game so that the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 700a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the number of prize balls paid out for the balls entering the specific winning opening 65a from affecting the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.

Therefore, for example, by setting the number of prize balls to be paid out for the balls to be entered into the specific winning opening 65a to be larger than the number of prize balls to be paid out for the balls to be entered into the second specific winning opening 700a, the number of prize balls to be paid out for the jackpot game It is possible to construct a game machine in which the number of prize balls by the small hit game is increased while suppressing the above.

Further, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for the balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out for the balls entered in the second specific winning opening 700a, the prize balls in the small hit game are set. It is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls by the jackpot game is increased while the number of prize balls is suppressed (for example, the number of prize balls equivalent to that of the launch ball is maintained).

When the moving upper lid member 730 is operated in a plurality of round games and is controlled so that the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 700a, does the game state after the big hit game pass through the opening 751? Regarding the event that changes depending on whether or not, if the game ball passes through the opening 751 in at least one round game controlled so as to be able to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, the game ball enters the opening 751. Is recognized as having passed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not determined to be a small hit has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example, both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be determined to be a small hit. Alternatively, the special symbol 1 may be determined to be a small hit, while the special symbol 2 may not be determined to be a small hit.

In the first embodiment, the case where the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the normal state is the first operation pattern has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a under normal conditions may be configured to be the third operation pattern.

In this case, a ball can enter the second winning opening 640 from the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol), but the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the special symbol is long except for the jackpot. Since it is set in a period (10 minutes in this embodiment), it is rare to win a big hit by lottery of special symbol 2, and basically, special symbol 1 by entering the first winning opening 64 It is possible to build a playability aiming for a big hit by lottery.

In this case, for example, the gaming state after executing the jackpot game of jackpot B is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is acquired, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set as the second operation pattern. If the state is set to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, the electric accessory 640a will be operated in the third operation pattern after the 101st special symbol lottery, which is the jackpot A. It is the same as the game state after executing the jackpot game. That is, it is possible to configure a case where a specified number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) of the special symbol is drawn after the jackpot game is completed and the state shifts to the special probability change state.

In the case of jackpot C as well, the state in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern is configured to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, and the 101st special symbol After the lottery, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate in the third operation pattern, but since it is in the low probability state of the special symbol, it simply shifts to the normal state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution of the jackpot type differs between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be set so that the distribution of the jackpot type is the same. In this case, no matter which special symbol wins the jackpot, there is no difference, so that the lottery for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the jackpot of the special symbol 2 can be equated. In this case, for example, the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed with a long fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation of 10 minutes) is excluded, and the fluctuation time is the same as the fluctuation time selected in the lottery of the special symbol 1. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game machine in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 8 (the total of 4 reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and 4 reserved balls of the special symbol 2).

Further, for example, among the jackpots of the special symbol 1, the ratio of the jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends to the high probability state and the jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends has a low probability state (the above-mentioned first). 1: 1) in one embodiment, among the jackpots of the special symbol 2, the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is in a high probability state, and the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is in a low probability state. It may be configured so as to be different from the ratio with (1: 1 in the first embodiment).

In this case, the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is configured so that the proportion of the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is higher than that of the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is larger. It is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of shifting to a state in which jackpots of symbol 2 are likely to occur continuously.

In the first embodiment, the case where the direction operation unit display 816 can be displayed at the same time as the display of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the company name display effect or the card forgetting prevention display effect, an adjustment period may be provided in which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed so that the volume light amount can be adjusted. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 means the end timing of the adjustment period and at the same time means the start timing of the variation effect after the end of the jackpot game. By visually recognizing, the action from the adjustment of the volume light amount during the adjustment period to the launch of the ball after the start timing of the fluctuation effect can be smoothly performed at an appropriate timing.

The period of the ending effect is defined by the jackpot type, but the internal configuration of the ending effect can be changed even if the jackpot type is the same. When the adjustment period is provided, the period for executing the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is narrowed as compared with the case where the adjustment period is not provided, but one of the effects is continued. By shortening the time or performing a plurality of effects at the same time, it is possible to execute the ending effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Whether or not to provide an adjustment period can be arbitrarily set, but for example, among a plurality of variations, the effect executed during the jackpot game tends to have a particularly strong light intensity (the strongest light intensity) or a particularly loud volume. When it is set that the volume tends to be large (maximum volume), an adjustment period may be provided in the ending effect. As a result, the player's playing burden can be reduced.

The length of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect can be changed regardless of whether or not the adjustment period is provided. For example, while the jackpot is in a row, the amount of information does not increase even if you look at it many times in a short period of time. The length of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect can be shortened or displayed at the same time. By doing so, the ending display effect can be lengthened accordingly. The ending display effect is important for the player, such as the number of prize balls actually obtained (either only the jackpot game currently being executed or the cumulative total during the consecutive villas) and the game state after the jackpot game is completed. Since information with a high value is displayed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the information by lengthening the display period.

For example, when the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state, there is a high possibility that the consecutive villas will be cut off, so that the player is likely to leave the seat after the game is completed. Therefore, by lengthening the length of the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player forgets to take the card home.

For example, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the special probability change state, it is the timing when the player's expectation for the ball is the highest, so by visually recognizing the company name display effect at this timing, the present It is possible to improve the impression of the pachinko machine and the manufacturing company that are playing. In addition, if the jackpots are consecutive villas, the expectations of the players will increase, so by setting the company name display effect to be longer as the number of consecutive villas increases, the impression will be improved. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the volume light amount can be adjusted in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether the volume light amount adjustment has been executed in the ending effect, and the determination result influences the determination of the variable effect after the ending effect is completed.

For example, when a specific effect (such as a one-shot notification effect) that tends to increase the amount of light or volume compared to the normal main symbol stop notification is prepared as a variable effect, the amount of light is set during the immediately preceding ending effect. Even though the lowering adjustment has been performed, performing a specific effect may cause further fatigue to the player who is considered to be tired by the light, and the game is played on the way. May be interrupted. Therefore, when the adjustment for lowering the amount of light is executed during the immediately preceding ending effect, the game can be continued while waiting for the recovery of the player's fatigue by controlling so that the specific effect is not executed.

Also, during the jackpot game, if the player performs an operation to change the song that is played in the game state after the jackpot game ends, the player should want to hear the song, so it is currently being executed. In the ending effect of the jackpot game, the period for displaying the direction operation unit display 816 may be secured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the right end portion of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 at the end timing of the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the variation display of the normal symbol is continuing at the end timing of the ending effect and there is a time difference between the end timing of the ending effect and the start timing of the next variation of the normal symbol, the time difference is equal to the time. The timing at which the right end of the display 811 reaches the end position 812 may be shifted (delayed) with respect to the end timing of the ending effect. As a result, the electric accessory 640a operates in the operation pattern (operation pattern in the normal state, first operation pattern) that is ongoing from the jackpot game even though the ball is fired after the ending effect. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters the winning unit 400 in the present state.

That is, the winning unit in a state where the electric accessory 640a is operating in the operation pattern (second operation pattern or third operation pattern) after the ball fired after the ending effect is transferred from the end of the jackpot game. You can enter the ball in 400.

Even in this case, when the ending effect is completed, if there is a reserved ball of the special symbol, the change of the special symbol is started after the ending effect is completed. On the other hand, since the display of the time display 811 is desired to be continuously retained, for example, the display of the ending effect is continued in the main display area Dm, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds. The display of the small area Ds3 may be expanded and moved to the main display area Dm3 as soon as the next variation of the symbol is started.

Since the special symbol will be moved on the screen, it is preferable to move it before the low speed fluctuation (reach or the like). Therefore, in the above-mentioned display mode (movement of the special symbol), the time difference from the end timing of the ending effect to the start timing of the next fluctuation of the normal symbol is the time required for the transition to the low-speed fluctuation of the special symbol. It may be done only when the specific condition of being shorter than is met.

However, since the determination of the variation effect is made at the start of the variation, it is after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is unknown during the ending effect whether or not the display mode as described above can be performed. Therefore, after the ending effect is completed, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the above specific conditions are satisfied. In this case, the terminal position 812 may be moved to the right or a number such as "+2 seconds" may be displayed to notify that the ball launch timing has fallen backward. In this case, it is considered that the player starts firing the ball when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, but if it is notified immediately after that that the ball launch timing has fallen, that is the case. The player who sees can stop the firing of the ball. As a result, ball loss can be minimized.

In the first embodiment, the case where the display such as the specific display 810 and the frame button display 813 is displayed on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen (displayed in full screen), or may be displayed on different parts of the display screen.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time display 811 is displayed from the beginning in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displayed from the middle of the ending effect, or may be displayed by operating the frame button 22. Further, the time display 811 may be displayed or the time display 811 may disappear each time the frame button 22 is operated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time display 811 is displayed as a bar has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an arbitrary number may be displayed on the display screen and the number may be counted down to the target value (for example, 0 (zero)), or may be displayed to be counted up to the target value (for example, 600). .. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily plan the timing at which the display becomes the target value (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812).

Further, this display is not limited to the case of displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. For example, a second display device or a 7-segment display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is prepared, and a display for counting down or counting up is executed on the second display device or the 7-segment display device. You may.

The time display 811 may be represented by both a bar and a countdown (countup). For example, in addition to displaying the time display 811 as a bar, a number (for example, 3) is displayed on the display screen from a few seconds (for example, 3 seconds) before the time display 811 reaches the end position 812, and the number is displayed. A display that counts down may be executed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily plan the timing at which the display becomes 0 (zero) (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812).

In the first embodiment, the case where the operation of the frame button 22 is valid when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective even if the frame button display 813 is not displayed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the operation of the frame button 22 is valid when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting means may be arranged inside the frame button 22 and controlled so that the light emitting means emits light at a timing when the frame button 22 can be operated. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the position of the operation target (frame button 22).

In the first embodiment, in the ending effect, the company name display effect is executed when the game state of entering after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous state for the player, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is performed in the jackpot game. Although the case of execution when the number of payouts is 8 rounds or more (predetermined number or more) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the condition for executing the company name display effect and the condition for executing the card forgetting prevention display effect may be exchanged.

In addition, at least one of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be set to be always executed for each jackpot game regardless of the jackpot type, or the predetermined number of jackpots (for example, consecutive villas). It may be set to be executed at an odd number of jackpots, a jackpot that is a multiple of 3, etc.).

The content of the ending effect is not limited to the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and various modes are exemplified. For example, you can display a character string to calm the player, such as "Pachinko is a game. Be careful not to get stuck", or display a video explaining the clerk call button to unfamiliar players. , An operation for explaining a button operation for returning the movable accessory to the standby position may be displayed. While any of these displays is being executed, the frame button display 813 may be displayed to prompt the operation of the frame button 22, or the time display 811 may be displayed to notify the transition timing to the next effect. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the most advantageous state for the player is the special probability variation state has been described, but the state is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the state after the jackpot game ends differs depending on whether it is a probability change state or a time saving state (normal state) (when it does not shift to the special probability change state), the most advantageous state for the player is the probability change state.

Further, when the state after the jackpot game is completed is only the time saving state and there is a difference in the number of lottery times in which the time saving state continues, the state in which the number of lottery times in which the time saving state continues is the largest is the most advantageous for the player. Be in a state.

In addition, the state after the jackpot game ends is only the probability change state, and while one jackpot type continues the probability change state until the next jackpot, the other jackpot type shifts to the special probability change state after a predetermined number of lottery. In the case (such as when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the normal state is the third operation pattern), the other big hit type is more advantageous for the prize ball obtained during the small hit game in the special probability variation state. , The most gaming state for the player is the state after the end of the jackpot of the other jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ending display effect is always executed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type in which the ending display effect is not executed may be configured. In particular, when the number of prize balls paid out is extremely small compared to other jackpot types (for example, sudden probability change jackpot, sudden normal jackpot, etc.), it is better to omit the ending display effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the number is extremely small, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the symbol after the jackpot game is completed at an early stage.

In particular, a production for playing a game without making the boundary between the special probability variation state and the big hit game conspicuous (for example, a production in which the number of prize balls in the small hit game and the number of prize balls in the big hit game are totaled and described. ), By omitting the ending display effect during the consecutive villas and executing the ending display effect at the end of the consecutive villas, the special probability change state and the jackpot game are collectively combined for the player. It can be shown as one advantage.

Further, the above-mentioned contents are not limited to the ending display effect. For example, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be displayed at the ending display of the first jackpot that rushes into the consecutive villa, but may not be displayed during the consecutive villa regardless of the jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, the case where the prize ball display 801 and the identification display 802 are displayed on the screen at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the prize ball display 801 may be displayed on the screen, and then the identification display 802 may be displayed after the display is switched. In this case, the profit obtained in the jackpot game and the profit obtained after the transition from the jackpot game can be separately understood by the player, so that the player's game burden can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the lengths of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are set to be the same (5 seconds), but the length is not necessarily limited to this. The length of each effect can be arbitrarily set for each jackpot type. For example, the execution period of the card forgetting prevention display effect may be longer than that of other effects (for example, 10 seconds), or the card forgetting prevention display effect may be repeatedly executed. ..

Further, when it is repeatedly executed, it may be repeated continuously, or it may be repeated with another effect in between. For example, the ending display effect (second time) may be displayed after the card forgetting prevention display effect is completed. At this time, the prize ball display 801 is displayed in the first ending display effect, but the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not displayed, and the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are displayed in the second ending display effect. The prize ball display may not be displayed.

As a result, it is possible to separate the timing of notifying the profit (number of prize balls) obtained by the player in the jackpot game and the timing of notifying the state of the game after the jackpot game is completed, so that the player's game burden can be separated. Can be reduced. Further, by displaying the content of high interest of the player (identification display 802 in the above example) at the final stage of the ending effect, the player's attention to the ending effect can be maintained in a high state.

Further, at a predetermined timing of the ending effect, the content of high interest of the player (in the above example, when the identification display 802 can be displayed, the operation of the frame button 22 is executed before the timing of switching to the display. That is, by performing the frame button display 813, the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the feeling of participating in the game is felt by operating the frame button 22. It can be given to a person, and by displaying the identification display 802 immediately after the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player misses the identification display 802.

The length of the ending effect is not limited to a few seconds, and the length can be set arbitrarily (for example, according to the jackpot type). That is, in addition to the ending effect that finishes in a few seconds, an ending effect that takes several minutes may be prepared.

In the first embodiment, the lengths of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are set to be the same (5 seconds), and the ending effect depends on the combination of the effects to be executed. Although the case where the execution period of is changed has been explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the execution period of the ending effect is fixed and the company name display effect is set short, the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be long instead.

In this case, the player who can grasp that the company name display effect has ended in a short period of time can know that the card forgetting prevention display effect will be longer at that time, so that the time required for changing the volume and light amount settings can be changed. It is possible to grasp that the length is increased, and it is possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22.

In the first embodiment, the case where the company name display effect is executed after the ending display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed after the company name display effect is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display order of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect can be arbitrarily set, and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be executed before the company name display effect.

Further, any two effects of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be executed at the same time (executed in parallel). In this case, in order to avoid overlapping of the displays, it is preferable to separate the display positions in the third symbol display device 81. According to this, compared to the case where the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are executed in order (executed in series), the time required for the ending effect is the same as the effect is executed at the same time. Can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the company name display effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be prepared in which the ending display effect and the company name display effect are executed and the card forgetting prevention display effect is omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the frame button display 813 and the direction operation unit display 816 are displayed after the ending display effect and the settings can be changed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the ending display effect may be executed after a period in which the frame button display 813 or the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the setting can be changed has elapsed.

In this case, the period during which the frame button display 813 and the direction operation unit display 816 are displayed may be started after the ending effect is entered (after the round game of the final round is completed), or a big hit. It may be started during the digestion of the final round game in the game. In either case, the transition from the ending display effect to the variable effect can be smoothed.

The timing at which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the direction operation unit 45 can be operated is not limited to the time after the frame button 22 is operated. For example, the frame button display 813 may not be displayed, and the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed so that the direction operation unit 45 can be operated without the operation of the frame button 22.

In the first embodiment, the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the specific display 810 can be visually recognized while being moved to the edge side of the display screen even while adjusting the volume and the amount of light. The case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is continued has been explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since it is determined that the player who is about to leave the seat cannot adjust the volume and the amount of light again, the card forgetting prevention display effect may be disappeared when the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light is executed.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that if the frame button 22 is operated while the frame button display 813 is being displayed, the screen shifts to the adjustment screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment screen may be displayed while the frame button 22 is being pressed, and the screen may be returned to the screen before the operation when the frame button 22 is released. As a result, the player can know that the two-handed operation is optimal for changing the setting of the volume and the amount of light, and the hand can be released from the handle 51, so that the ball firing during the ending effect is suppressed. can do.

Before the player operates the frame button 22, the message "The light intensity and volume settings can be changed while the frame button is pressed" may be displayed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the two-handed operation is necessary at one time. By operating both hands in the ending effect, it is possible to suppress the firing of the ball at a timing when the profit margin is poor for the player even if the ball is fired. That is, the notification may be performed in such a manner that a plurality of operating means are operated at the same time at a timing when it may be more profitable for the player to suppress the firing of the game ball.

Further, for example, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the state in which the volume setting can be changed (display mode) and the state in which the light amount setting can be changed (display mode) may be switched.

Further, for example, during the ending effect, the adjustment screen is displayed while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the frame button 22 is released, the screen is controlled to return to the screen before the operation, while the ending effect ends and changes. After shifting to the display screen of the effect, it may be controlled so that the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted without pressing the frame button 22. As a result, it is possible to prevent the two-handed operation from being forced until after the ending effect is completed, so that the player can change the setting of the volume and the amount of light while operating the handle 51.

In the first embodiment, the case where the specific display 810 moves to the edge side of the screen when the frame button 22 is operated according to the frame button display 813 during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the player operates the frame button 22 according to the frame button display 813 during the execution of the company name display effect, the manufacturing company name (Company A) as the specific display 810 is displayed on the upper left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be moved to the corner (end side), and subsequently, the card forgotten prevention display may be displayed on the specific display 810. Even if the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the company name display effect to notify the player that the volume and light amount settings can be changed. good.

Further, even if the specific display 810 is displayed on the edge side of the display screen, if the volume and light intensity settings are not changed within the specified time (for example, within 2 seconds), the specific display 810 is displayed. It may be set to return to the center of the screen (arrangement before moving).

In the first embodiment, the case where the setting of the volume and the amount of light can be changed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when there are variations (first aspect, second aspect) in the pattern of the variation effect of the special symbol during the special probability change, the probability change, or the time reduction during the transition from the ending effect, which of them is selected is selected. It may be possible to change the setting. Here, the combination of the first aspect and the second aspect can be arbitrarily set, and for example, a combination of a black-and-white display mode and a color display mode, or a cartoon-like display mode and an animation-like display. Examples thereof include a combination with the mode, a display mode requiring a continuous pressing operation of the frame button 22, and a display mode requiring a long press operation of the frame button 22.

Further, for example, when the setting of the song (theme song or the like) played during the jackpot production or the variable production can be changed, the setting of the song may be changed in the ending production. Instead of the ending production, it may be during the fanfare production, during the round game, during the interval between rounds, or during the period straddling them.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that during the ending effect, the time display 811 and the end position 812 notify the end timing of the ending effect, and the display effect changes according to the operation of the frame button 22. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the notification of the end timing or the occurrence timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect due to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during the change of the symbol or during the reach, or during the jackpot game excluding the ending effect. It may be done during the production of.

For example, when the effect is performed during the fluctuation or reach of the symbol, the end timing of the notified effect may be the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped or the timing at which the pseudo continuous variation as the effect is started. .. In the former case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is reduced by 1, a lottery of a new special symbol can be obtained, which is an appropriate timing for urging the player to launch the ball. In the latter case, when the fluctuation of the special symbol itself lasts for several minutes, the player's concentration can be maintained by dividing it into short parts at the timing in the middle.

When the frame button 22 is operated in association with the frame button display 813 at the end of the reach, if it is a big hit, it shifts to the jackpot display screen, and if it is missed, it shifts to the missed display screen. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is looking at the frame button display 813 to understand the result of the change of the special symbol.

For example, it may be performed during the production during the jackpot game excluding the ending production. The operation of the frame button display 813 and the frame button 22 during the round is, for example, a promotion effect (for example, an effect of notifying that the fanfare effect is a 4-round jackpot but actually a 15-round jackpot). It can be used for the effect of notifying that the profit is higher than the profit expected to be obtained by the player by the notification in the fanfare effect).

In particular, as in the first embodiment, when the game state after the end of the big hit game changes depending on whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 in the round game, the frame button display 813 is displayed during the round game. By urging the player to operate the frame button 22, the player's attention is distracted from the opening 751, and a situation occurs in which it fails to confirm whether or not the ball has passed through the opening 751. be able to.

When the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory that projects to the front side of the display screen, the frame button 22 is operated according to the frame button display 813 during the round, and the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen when the promotion effect is executed. When controlled so as to project to the front side, it is easy for the player to understand that the promotion effect was successful by the movement of the movable accessory. Even if the frame button 22 is operated according to the frame button display 813 during the round, when the promotion effect is not executed (when the notification in the fanfare effect and the actual notification are the same), the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen. By controlling so that it does not overhang to the front side, it is easy for the player to know that the promotion effect has failed.

Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect due to the operation of the frame button 22 are executed when the lottery of the first symbol is not performed for a predetermined time (demo screen). You may try to run it inside. In this case, the notification makes it possible for the player to know that the game explanation display effect has been completed.

Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change in the displayed effect due to the operation of the frame button 22 are determined within the predetermined time in the effect related to the game in which the ball is passed through the predetermined detection port within the predetermined time. It may be executed when the sphere has not yet passed through the detection port of. In this case, the notification can make the player aware that the ball has not passed through the detection port.

Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect due to the operation of the frame button 22 may be executed during the fanfare effect in the jackpot game or at the interval between rounds. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is opened at the end timing of the effect, the player can easily grasp the timing suitable for launching the ball.

Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect due to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during a period including a plurality of round games and inter-round intervals in the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to configure an effect longer than the time set as a single round game or an interval between rounds, and notify the end timing of the long effect and display it when the frame button 22 is operated. By making it possible to execute the change of the effect to be performed, the player can concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In the first embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed when a predetermined time elapses after the number of reserved balls of the first symbol becomes 0. In this case, even the player who has not won the jackpot can visually recognize the card forgetting prevention display effect.

Further, for example, it may be executed at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol for a long time (for example, 60 seconds or more). In this case, it is possible to notify the player who intends to purchase drinks, etc. in his spare time that the fluctuation of the first symbol for a long time will start, and not to forget the card when leaving his seat. It can call attention.

In the first embodiment, the period in which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted is until the end of the ending effect, or during the first fluctuation after the end of the ending effect. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set during the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol during the fluctuation of the first symbol or during the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. In this case, from the timing when the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the period in which the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted ends, the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the medium-speed fluctuation display, and the timing when the medium-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low speed The player can grasp the timing of shifting to the variable display (reach display, etc.).

Further, it may be possible to configure a period in which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted during the fluctuation of the special symbol (including during the low-speed fluctuation display). In this case, the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed in the small area Ds3, or the display may be interchangeable between the small area Ds3 and the main display area Dm.

In this case, during the variable display of the special symbol, a notification suggesting that an adjustable period is prepared is executed, and then a notification for that period is executed, a frame button display 813, etc. is displayed. The directional control unit display 816 may be displayed, and the volume and the amount of light may be adjusted, so that the notification may be performed stepwise. In this case, even during the variable display of the special symbol, the player's interest can be shifted step by step, so that the player may not notice that the adjustable period is prepared. Can be easily avoided.

In addition to this, the adjustment of the volume light amount may be controlled so as to be effective after the next fluctuation, or when the special symbol that was fluctuating when the volume light amount is adjusted becomes a big hit, the volume It may be controlled so that the jackpot game can be performed while maintaining the adjustment of the amount of light.

Further, for example, not only during the first fluctuation, but also until the end of the plurality of fluctuations, the period in which the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted may continue, or the fluctuation of the first symbol may change. It may be configured so that the period in which the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted continues until a predetermined mode (for example, fluctuation for a long time or fluctuation for obtaining a big hit) is reached.

Further, a period may be prepared in which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted in the latter half of the variable effect which is a big hit or in the fanfare effect. In this case, the volume during the jackpot can be set, and the player can grasp the start timing of the jackpot game from the timing of the end of the period.

In the first embodiment, the case where the terminal position 812 is fixed and the time display 811 moves with the passage of time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving speed of the time display 811 may be a constant speed, or the moving speed of the time display 811 may be configured to be changeable on the way. Further, for example, the right end portion of the time display 811 may be configured to move in the opposite direction (left side).

Further, for example, the terminal position 812 may be configured to be movable. That is, by moving the terminal position 812 while the time display 811 is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

The movement of the end position 812 may be configured to wait for the time display 811 to arrive and move immediately after the time display 811 arrives, or before the time display 811 reaches the end position 812. It may be configured to move in.

Further, the moving direction of the terminal position 812 as the moving destination of the time display 811 is not limited to the left-right direction. For example, it may move in the vertical direction or may move in a swirling manner. This makes it difficult to predict the time it takes for the time display 811 to reach the end position 812.

In the first embodiment, the case where the direction operation unit 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen and the specific display 810 is moved to the corner on the display screen by operating the frame button 22 in the ending effect has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific display 810 may be arranged in the corner of the display screen before the frame button 22 is operated. Further, for example, by operating the frame button 22, the movable accessory may extend to the vicinity of the center of the display screen, and the display position of the specific display 810 may be changed to a position not hidden by the movable accessory.

Further, for example, the specific display 810 may be set to disappear by operating the frame button 22 in the ending effect, or the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be set for the first time by operating the frame button 22 in the ending effect. It may be configured to be displayed, or a combination thereof may be used.

In the first embodiment, the case where the display mode of the horizontal scale display 818 on the display screen changes when the volume is changed in the ending effect is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to or instead of this, a predetermined line may be output when the volume is changed.

For example, when the line "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is output, the player can be alerted to forgetting the card every time the player changes the volume.

Further, the content, volume or voice (voice color) of the dialogue may be changed according to the changed volume. In particular, if the content of the dialogue (for example, "Be careful not to forget to remove the card" or "Please be sure to take the card home") or the voice changes (for example, the voice of a different character), the player will have his or her own voice. It can be easily set to the desired volume.

In the first embodiment, the case where the comment displayed on the caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 in the ending effect matches the target whose setting can be changed by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, a comment that does not match the target that the player can change the setting may be displayed.

In this case, if there is a big hit among the pending start prizes, the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819 is expected to indicate "big hit !?" or "a big chance is occurring" ( By displaying a comment that makes the player expect that a jackpot may be obtained), the player can expect to win the next jackpot during the ending production, so the player's attention to the ending production The power can be improved, and the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22 can be increased.

If an expectation is displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819 and a jackpot can already be expected, it is usual to refrain from firing the ball until the jackpot game is started in order to avoid wasting the ball. Is. Therefore, even if the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 according to the end time of the ending effect, there is a high possibility that the attention of the player cannot be increased.

Therefore, the time display 811 may be configured not to reach the end position 812 at the end of the ending effect, but to reach the end position 812 at the timing when the variable effect of the lottery, which is a big hit, ends. In this case, the player's attention to the time display 811 and the end position 812 can be improved.

In this case, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed until the timing at which the display starts in the ending effect and the variable effect of the lottery that becomes a big hit ends, or the display is not displayed in the ending effect. It may be displayed after the transition to the subsequent variable effect.

In the former case, the player notices that the jackpot has already been obtained from the stage of watching the ending production, so the player should understand that it is not necessary to fire the ball immediately after the jackpot game ends. Can be done. Therefore, the player can suppress the launch of the ball.

In the latter case, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed without waiting for the variable effect of the lottery that becomes a big hit when the ending effect is changed to the variable effect, or the variable effect of the lottery that becomes a big hit is started. It may be displayed later or at the same time as the start of the variable effect. In any case, the player can grasp that the jackpot will be a big hit even before the variation effect is completed, so that, for example, the variation effect takes a long time (for example, one variation requires 10 minutes). ) Even in this case, the player can suppress the launch of the ball, and it is easier to avoid the situation where the player leaves the game machine without noticing that there is a big hit in the pending start prize. it can.

In addition, when there is a big hit among the reserved start prizes, the expected display is not displayed in the ending effect, but the time display 811 and the end position 812 are displayed during the variable effect, and the lottery that becomes the big hit. It may be configured so that the terminal position 812 is reached at the timing when the variation effect ends.

In addition, when there is a big hit among the reserved start prizes, the display mode may be changed according to the number of the big hit start prizes. For example, when the number of starting prizes to be a big hit is two, the expected display of "big hit x 2 !?" may be displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819. As an expectation display of "multiple big hits !?", there will be multiple big hits, but it may be unclear how many starting prizes will be big hits. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

At this time, when the time display 811 is configured to reach the end position 812 at the timing when the variable effect of the lottery that becomes the big hit ends, the variable effect of the lottery that becomes the big hit first ends from the end of the ending effect. By setting the timing to do so, the player's feelings can be smoothly transferred to the jackpot game.

Further, if the display position of the comment that does not match the target whose setting can be changed by the player is set in the small area Ds3 and the frame button display 813 disappears by operating the frame button 22 while the frame button display 813 is displayed, The comment may be configured to be visible, or the comment display may be set to the entire display screen (full screen display). In this case, the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22 can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the case of shifting from the card forgetting prevention display effect to the next variable effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single picture (still image) may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 between the card forgetting prevention display effect and the next variable display screen. In this case, if the symbol variation starts at the start of displaying the single picture, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 coincides with the time when the single picture starts to be displayed. It is good to set as.

Further, the symbol variation may be started shortly after the transition to the variation display screen after the jackpot game is completed. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 may be set to the timing after shifting to the variable display screen after the end of the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, the case where the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 is configured as a timing suitable for the player to start firing the ball has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the time display 811 is displayed during a period in which the player can obtain a predetermined profit by firing the ball, and the player fires the ball at the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It may be configured as a suitable timing for terminating. In this case, while the time display 811 is moving to the right, it is possible to urge the player to fire the ball, and to urge the player to stop firing the ball at an appropriate timing. Can be done.

Further, in this case, if the specified condition is satisfied at the timing before the right end portion of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays "ready" or the like. A character string may be displayed or the display on the display screen may be switched to notify the player that the specified conditions have been met. In this case, the display of the time display 811 may be maintained even after the specified conditions are satisfied, or the display of the time display 811 may be turned off when the specified conditions are satisfied. good.

For example, if the game machine is controlled so that the character string is displayed on the display screen on condition that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2 or both) is 4 (full tank). By checking the character string, the player can grasp that the lottery for the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2 or both) cannot be obtained even if the ball is fired any more. As a result, the player can be urged to stop firing the ball at an appropriate timing without controlling the movement speed of the time display 811 to be suddenly changed.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the caution comment display 815 is displayed before the frame button 22 is pressed and the second caution comment display 819 is displayed after the frame button 22 is pressed has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to.

For example, even after the frame button 22 is pressed, only the caution comment display 815 is displayed, the direction operation unit 816 and the vertical scale display 817 are displayed, but the horizontal scale display 818 may be controlled so as not to be displayed. In this case, the content of the caution comment 815 that was displayed before the frame button 22 was pressed and the target (light intensity) whose setting can be changed by operating the frame button 22 match, so that the frame button 22 is operated. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with respect to.

For example, if the caution comment display 815 disappears before the frame button 22 is pressed and only the second caution comment display 819 is displayed, the second caution comment display 819 is displayed even after the frame button 22 is pressed. Caution The comment display 815 is not displayed, and the direction operation unit 816 and the horizontal scale display 818 are displayed, but the vertical scale display 817 may be controlled so as not to be displayed. In this case, since the content of the second caution comment 819 displayed before the frame button 22 is pressed and the target (volume) whose setting can be changed by operating the frame button 22 match, the frame button 22 It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with the operation of.

As a result, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 after confirming in advance whether or not the setting of the target (volume or light amount) for which he / she wants to change the setting can be changed. , The operation load of the frame button 22 can be reduced.

Further, the case where the frame button display 813 and the operation target when the frame button 22 is operated is displayed at different places has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the triangular mark of the frame button display 813 is a musical note, the volume can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22, while the triangular mark of the frame button display 813 is a light bulb mark. May be controlled so that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. That is, by changing the display mode of the frame button display 813 itself, the target that can be adjusted by the operation of the frame button 22 may be notified.

Further, when there are a plurality of operating means corresponding to the frame button 22 and their shapes are different, it is possible to configure a display corresponding to the different shape as the frame button display 813. Therefore, which operating means is used by the frame button display 813. It is possible to notify the player whether the operation should be performed. In this case, the object that can be adjusted may be changed according to the operating means to be operated.

In the second embodiment, the case where the slide member 2450 is integrally molded with the front projecting portion 2457 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front projecting portion 2457 and the slide member 2450 are molded separately, and the load transmission accompanying the slide member 2450 slides in the front-rear direction causes the front projecting portion 2457 to appear and displace in the vertical direction. , The case where the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b project from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a and the case where the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b do not project from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a may be switched.

In this case, as compared with the case where the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b are displaced in the front-rear direction, the load applied to the ball from the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b flows down in the central flow path 2431. Since the component along the line can be reduced, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is erroneously accelerated when the ball interference projecting portions 2458a and 2458b are displaced forward.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is configured to be assembleable to the rolling plate portion 4421 and used without assembling the obstruction rod portion 4425, or when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is used by assembling to the rolling plate portion 4421. As a result, the rolling plate portion 4421 can also be used, and the cost can be reduced by making the rolling plate portion 4421 a common component.

Further, for example, the rolling plate portion 4421 and the interfering rod portion 4425 may be formed as separate bodies so that the interfering rod portion 4425 is interlocked during the operation of the rolling plate portion 4421. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 can be improved. In this case, the drive device for driving the rolling plate portion 4421 may be used in combination with the drive device for driving the interference rod portion 4425, or another drive device may be prepared.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion 4421 is arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the guide portion 4413 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 may be extended to the left and formed so as to cover the upper surface of the guide portion 4413. In this case, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 and flows down can be smoothly placed on the guide portion 4413. That is, the height position of the rolling plate portion 4421 is lowered (sinking) due to the weight of the sphere, the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 is arranged at a position lower than the upper surface of the guide portion 4413, and is downstream of the rolling plate portion 4421. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance becomes large when the ball that has reached the side moves to the guide portion 4413 side. The same can be said for the upstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 and both ends of the opening / closing member of the variable winning device 65.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the electric accessory 4420 is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced. The rotation axis of the rotational displacement is, for example, a direction along the opening in the opening (a horizontally long opening formed on the back surface side of the flow path constituent portion 4410) in which the rolling plate portion 4421 appears and disappears in the fourth embodiment. It may be arranged so as to extend to.

A horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate is formed so as to hang downward from the rotation axis. The state in which the opening / closing plate hangs down corresponds to the non-guidance state, and in this state, an obstructing portion capable of obstructing the passage of the ball is formed at the downstream end portion of the opening / closing plate so as to correspond to the obstructing rod portion 4425. By rotating the opening / closing plate 90 degrees in the direction in which the opening / closing plate rises (backflip direction) from the non-guidance state, the opening / closing plate can guide the ball toward the guide portion 4413, and this state corresponds to the guided state. In this state, the disturbing portion is retracted to the back surface side of the flow path constituent portion 4410.

With this configuration, even if the sphere flows toward the plate-shaped portion 4412 from the rotation axis in the non-guided state, the sphere depends on the arrangement of the sphere when the opening / closing plate is displaced in the backflip direction. Can be rescued above the axis of rotation.

Further, for example, the rotation axis of the rotational displacement may be arranged so as to extend in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the opening where the rolling plate portion 4421 appears and disappears in the fourth embodiment. A state in which the opening / closing plate extends from the rotating shaft in the same direction as the guide state in the fourth embodiment is configured as the guide state. The vertical arrangement of the ball entrance 4411 and the ceiling 4414 is upward so that the opening / closing plate can be rotationally displaced from the guided state to the state of rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis (corresponding to the non-guided state). Has been pulled up to. That is, according to this configuration, a state in which the opening / closing plate is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the guided state is configured as a non-guided state, and interferes with the rolling plate portion 4421 in the fourth embodiment. The rod portion 4425 and the rod portion 4425 are formed of the same portion.

With this configuration, when the opening / closing plate is rotated from the guided state to the non-guided state, all the balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate in the guided state are guided to the guide portion 4413 side. be able to. As a result, when the electric accessory 4420 is slidably displaced from the guided state to the non-guided state in the fourth embodiment, most of the balls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 in the guided state are plate-shaped portions 4412. The ball can be easily guided to the guide portion 4413 side as compared with flowing down to the side.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the ball receiving rotating member 5771 that is rotationally displaced is arranged between the second specific winning opening 700a and the opening 751 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a rotating portion that can swing left and right, and may be movable so as to distribute the flow path of the sphere to either the left or right.

Further, for example, an opening / closing plate that slides and displaces may be arranged. In this case, the opening / closing plate may be used to open / close the flow path or opening 751 to the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

Further, the opening / closing plate may be configured to be arranged on the flow path or the opening 751 to the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715 so as to switch the flow path of the sphere. That is, the flow path to the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is opened while the opening 751 is closed, and the flow path to the region between the pair of storage plate portions 715 is closed. On the other hand, a state in which the opening 751 is opened may be configured to be switchable by an opening / closing plate.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where one ball is received in the ball receiving recess 5772 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to accept a predetermined number exceeding 1 (for example, 2 each). In this case, when the ball receiving rotating member 5771 rotates at a constant speed, a plurality of (predetermined number) balls can be put together at a position between the pair of storage plate portions 715.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is always rotated in the clockwise direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, assuming that the constant rotation operation is the same, an operation timing for rotating in the counterclockwise direction may be inserted at predetermined intervals. In this case, for example, even when a ball bite occurs between the ball receiving recess 5772 and the flow control member 5778, the ball bite can be eliminated by reversing the rotation direction.

Further, in the case of a predetermined jackpot type, the ball receiving rotation member 5771 may be stopped for the first 10 seconds of the round game, and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be rotated after 10 seconds have passed. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the pair of storage plate portions 715 side (opening 751 side) in the first 10 seconds, the state of the nail KG1 is larger than that of the ball guided to the moving upper lid member 730 side. In a state where there are more balls that deviate, the number of balls entered in the second specific winning opening 700a in the first 10 seconds can be reduced, so that the possibility that the balls pass through the opening 751 can be increased.

Further, the rotation direction of the ball receiving rotation member 5771, the rotation speed (including whether it is constant or variable), and the presence / absence of reversal of the rotation direction may be set for each jackpot type. In this case, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball receiving rotation member 5771.

In the fifth embodiment, the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is such that the ball does not spill sideways when the ball flows from the second specific winning opening 700a to the ball receiving recess 5772. The narrow case has been explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is longer than the diameter of the ball and the ball receiving recess 5772 is filled with the ball, the ball passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. The sphere may be configured to spill laterally and flow to the inclined plate portion 5718b.

In this case, even if the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771 is stopped, the ball entering the second specific winning opening 700a is not delayed, so that the ball receiving rotating member 5771 can be controlled to be stopped at a predetermined timing. ..

When the ball receiving rotation member 5771 is stopped during the round game, the ball can be prevented from flowing into the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 until the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is next started to operate. It is possible to delay the timing at which the sphere is introduced at the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 and the timing at which the sphere passes through the opening 751.

In the sixth embodiment, the predetermined time length elapsed from the timing when the right tip portion of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the timing when the right tip portion of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is Although the case where the ball is designed to be slightly longer than the average length elapsed from the launch of the ball to the arrival at the through gates 66 and 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the average length that elapses from the launch of the ball to the arrival at the through gates 66 and 67 is used as a comparison target, and the probability of entering the through gates 66 and 67 is taken into consideration to describe the above in a longer time. It is also possible to design a predetermined time length of.

In the sixth embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured as a target suggestion display 6822 that prompts the user to aim at the through gates 66 and 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a game machine in which a jackpot game or a game in a time saving state, a probabilistic state, or a special probabilistic state is performed by right-handed, a display of "right-handed" is displayed on the display screen instead of the target suggestion display 6822. Is also good. Further, at the timing when the target suggestion display 6822 is expanded, the display of "right-handed" may be configured to be enlarged as a whole. Alternatively, the display of "right-handed" may be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the ending effect, or the "right-handed" display may be displayed from the middle of the ending effect. 3 It may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the symbol display device 81.

For example, when the target suggestion display 6822 is displayed by the fanfare effect, the target suggestion display 6822 may be designed to suggest aiming at the second specific winning opening 700a or the opening 751 of the upper variable winning device 700. In this case, if the target suggestion display 6822 is set to be maintained on the display screen during the first round game until the passage of the ball is detected in the opening 751, the player displays the target suggestion display. Since it is possible to know that the sphere has passed through the opening 751 by the disappearance of 6822, it is possible to improve the attention to the target suggestion display 6822.

Further, in addition to the method of urging the through gates 66 and 67 to be aimed at on the display screen as in the target suggestion display 6822, for example, a light emitting means for emitting light in the vicinity of the through gates 66 and 67 of the game board 13 is provided. , The light emitting means may be made to emit light at the timing when the target suggestion display 6822 is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the position where the ball is aimed by relying on the light.

Further, although the case where the target suggestion display 6822 is displayed in the ending effect has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when shifting from the ending effect to the variable effect, the display of the target suggestion display 6822 may be continuously maintained for a predetermined period even in the variable effect. Further, the display period of the target suggestion display 6822 may be set with a predetermined time width, and the number of balls entering at the target entry port (as a predetermined number, for example, the number of reserved balls of the first symbol). Permissible number, 4 in this embodiment) may be continued until detected.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display 6831 is used to promote the stop of the firing of the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game stop suggestion display 6831 may be used to prompt the stop of the operation of the frame button 22. As a result, it is possible for a player who operates the frame button 22 without knowing that the frame button 22 is operated at an inappropriate timing to know that the frame button 22 is being operated at an inappropriate timing. Since it can be done, the game burden can be reduced.

In addition, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is composed of a notation that urges the execution of "right-handed" to be stopped and does not stop "left-handed" (for example, a comment "Please return to left-handed"). You may.

Further, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, the illumination unit 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. may be made to emit intense light, or may be made to emit light in an abnormal color (for example, dark red), or may be emitted from the speaker. You may output comments such as "Please stop firing the ball" or "Please return to left-handed" at the volume.

In the sixth embodiment, it has been explained that the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed when the passage of the ball at the through gates 66 and 67 is detected before the end of the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. That is, it may be displayed when the ball is detected at the predetermined entry port even though the entry of the ball into the predetermined entry port is not scheduled.

The predetermined ball entrances are not limited to the through gates 66 and 67, but various entrances (general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, specific winning opening). 65a, the second specific winning opening 700a, the opening 751 and the like) are exemplified.

For example, the period during which the ball is not scheduled to enter is other than the specified period in the right-handed machine (a game machine that plays a right-handed game in a predetermined period such as a time saving state) in addition to the execution of the ending effect. The period of is illustrated. That is, it is inappropriate to set the game stop suggestion display 6831 to be displayed when the ball is detected at the ball entry port arranged on the right side of the game area during a period other than the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the player from hitting right at the timing.

Further, for example, examples of the period during which the ball is not scheduled to enter include during the fanfare production in the jackpot game and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. That is, by setting the game stop suggestion display 6831 to be displayed when a ball is detected at the entry port during the fanfare production or during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the specific winning opening 65a or the first 2 It is possible to suppress the firing of balls at the timing when the flow path to the specific winning opening 700a is not open (closed), and it is possible to minimize the generation of wasted balls.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display 6831 prompts the immediate stop of the ball launch has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display may be changed according to the number of reserved balls in the lottery accompanying the entry of balls at a predetermined start opening (for example, the second winning opening 640).

That is, for example, when the ball is controlled so that it can be expected to enter a predetermined starting port by launching a ball and there is a margin until the number of reserved balls becomes full (4) (for example, the number of reserved balls is 2). (In the case of pieces), a comment that can be grasped by the player as a margin is displayed as the game stop suggestion display 6831 (for example, "two more"), or the game preparation suggestion is not displayed without displaying the game stop suggestion display 6831. When the number of reserved balls is full by displaying the display 6841, the ball is launched like the game stop suggestion display 6831 as explained in the sixth embodiment above or the comment such as "ready". It may be configured to suggest that it is unnecessary.

In the sixth embodiment, when the launch of the ball is detected, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed to prompt the stop of the launch of the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, or in accordance with the game stop suggestion display 6831, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed (notified). As a result, it is possible to reduce the regret of the player as compared with the case where only the regret of hitting the ball wasted is given to the player. Not only that, but in some cases, the ending effect can be directed to the player's preference for firing the ball.

In this case, as information that is beneficial to the player, for example, information on whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the low probability state of the first symbol or the high probability state of the first symbol, or after the end of the jackpot game. Information on whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, a probability change state, or a special probability change state, and whether the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a changes or does not change after a predetermined number of lottery times have elapsed after the jackpot game ends. Information such as whether or not there is a jackpot in the currently held lottery of the first symbol, and the game machine can change the setting of the jackpot probability of the first symbol (for example). , The jackpot probability in the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1/32. Information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when configured (setting 1) or setting in 1/26 (setting 2) can be changed) is exemplified.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the setting change is canceled (initialized) when a specified time elapses after the light amount and volume setting change is executed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Various aspects are exemplified as the conditions for canceling the setting change. For example, the transition to the game explanation display (so-called demo screen) executed on the display screen before the game is started may be a condition for canceling the setting change, or the time may be controlled so that it can be determined. The condition that the setting change is canceled may be that the specified time is reached, or the condition that the setting change is canceled may be that the number of jackpots on the same day or multiple days is the specified number of jackpots.

Further, the frame button 22 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the frame button display 813 is displayed in the game explanation display before the start of the game, the timing when the frame button display 813 is not displayed during the game, etc.). This may be a condition for canceling the setting change, or it may be a condition for canceling the setting change that the passage of the ball is detected at a predetermined winning opening or through gates 66 and 67 during the ending effect. , Acquiring a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type may be a condition for canceling the setting change, or when the amount of balls stored in the upper plate 17 exceeds the permissible amount, a ball removal notification is executed. It may be a condition that the setting change is canceled.

Further, it is a notification set to be performed when it is determined that the ball is flowing down the right game area 303, such as when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 at a timing when the right-handed game should not be played. , Notification to urge the player to play the game by left-handed (for example, notification to output a voice such as "Please return to left-handed", left-pointing arrow and "" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be a condition that the setting change is canceled that the notification) that displays the comment "Please return to left-handed" is executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the volume and the amount of light can be changed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which only the volume can be changed, a state in which only the amount of light can be changed, and a state in which both the volume and the amount of light can be changed may be switchable. This switching may be switched by operating the frame button 22, or may be switched by the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the effect to be executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the volume and light amount settings immediately before the volume and light amount setting changes are canceled can be grasped by the player by the past light amount display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a numerical value indicating the difference between the current state and the immediately preceding set value may be notified by display such as "+1" or "-2" or by voice. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the operation required to return to the setting before the cancellation.

In the seventh embodiment, the case of suggesting the setting in the state before the setting of the volume and the amount of light is canceled has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the player is changing the volume and light intensity settings, the settings before the setting change may be suggested. In this case, even if the player intentionally makes a change, if he / she does not like the change, he / she can easily return to the original setting. Therefore, it is possible to lower the hurdle for changing the setting of the volume and the amount of light.

In the eighth embodiment, the display mode in which the scattered frame button displays 8813 are materialized when they are combined and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a semi-transparent frame button display 8813 is specified as an effect that serves as a guideline for the elapsed time of the ending effect, not as a display that prompts the operation of the frame button 22 (whether or not the display is related to the operation). It may be configured to materialize at the timing.

Further, for example, the semi-transparent single frame button display 8813 may be moved or stopped, and may be displayed so as to be switched between a semi-transparent state and a materialized state at a predetermined timing. In this case, since it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the frame button display 8813 is materialized, it is possible to improve the attention to the frame button display 8813.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the timing at which the frame button display 8813 materializes is displayed as the operation timing of the frame button 22 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mark or a comment (“PUSH” or the like) suggesting the operation timing of the frame button 22 may be displayed on the horizontally long frame in which the time display 811 moves. In this case, the time display 811 can be used for both the purpose of suggesting the end timing of the ending effect and the purpose of suggesting the operation timing of the frame button 22.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the scattered frame button displays 8813 move in the direction of further separation after being moved and united has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the frame button display 8813 is united and materialized, the frame button display 8813 may be controlled to disappear after a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the frame button display 8813 is translucent or materialized corresponds to whether the operation of the frame button 22 is valid or invalid, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, during the period when the frame button display 8813 is materialized, a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid and a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid may be configured.

For example, the frame button display 8813 is displayed on the display screen immediately after the card forgetting prevention display effect is started, while the timing of switching between valid and invalid operation of the frame button 22 is set to be the same as that described in the eighth embodiment. It may be configured to be materialized and displayed in the center of.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where each period T81, T82, T83 is set as a delimiter between the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid and the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for each period T81, T82, T83, and the difference between each period T81, T82, T83 is set as the difference in the effect mode to be transferred by the operation of the frame button 22. You may.

That is, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period T81, the screen shifts to an adjustment display screen in which the volume setting can be changed but the light amount setting cannot be changed, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the second period T82. When operated, the screen shifts to the adjustment display screen where the volume setting and the light intensity setting can be changed, and when the frame button 22 is operated in the third period T83, the volume setting cannot be changed. The light intensity setting may be changed to the adjustment display screen that enables the change. In addition to this, the difference between T81, T82, and T83 for each period may be set as the difference in the effect display (moving image in which the display is executed) that is transferred by operating the frame button 22.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where each period T81, T82, and T83 are set to the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The lengths of T81, T82, and T83 for each period can be arbitrarily set, and the set contents can correspond to various conditions.

For example, the length setting of T81, T82, and T83 may be changed for each jackpot type, and it is unlikely that the setting will be changed now while the probabilistic state continues multiple times. The T82 may be set to be shortened for two periods.

In addition, especially in the case of a jackpot type (maximum round jackpot or exceptionally intense (long) jackpot) where the volume and light intensity are large, the setting is set to be longer in the second period T82 so that it is easy to change the setting. You may. In this case, if the first period T81 is set short, it is possible to secure a long period for executing the setting change of the volume and the amount of light in the ending effect, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the setting of the light amount and the volume can be changed by operating the frame button 22 according to the display mode of the frame button display 8813 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by operating the frame button 22, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed.

In this case, the information that is beneficial to the player is, for example, whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is the low probability state of the first symbol or the high probability state of the first symbol, as described above. Information, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game is in the normal state, the time saving state, the probability change state, or the special probability change state, and the operation of the electric accessory 640a after the predetermined number of lottery has passed after the jackpot game is completed. Information on whether the pattern changes or does not change, information on whether or not there is a jackpot among the reserved balls of the lottery of the first symbol currently held, and the jackpot probability of the game machine of the first symbol (For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state can be changed. , Information suggesting the current jackpot probability setting when configured to set 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)) is exemplified. ..

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Long means to guide the game ball>
A ball entry area, a guide means for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry area, a first detection means arranged on the downstream side of the guide means and detecting the passage of the game ball, and a downstream of the guide means. When the passage of the game ball is detected on the side, the first detection means can give the player a profit different from the profit that can be given to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball. The guide means is provided with two detection means, and the guide means is arranged on a predetermined portion for receiving a game ball flowing down from the entry region and a predetermined portion on the downstream side of the predetermined portion, and is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the predetermined portion. A first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detection means and a first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second detection means, at least according to the arrangement of the downstream side portion. A game machine A1 characterized in that the state can be changed by two states.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the passage of a game ball is detected in a predetermined detection area (second starting winning opening 27), it is opened with a certain probability to the winning ball opening arranged on the back side. A movable accessory (second variable winning device 31) capable of guiding the game ball is arranged, and the movable accessory is frequently opened to cause the ball to enter the prize ball opening frequently. There is a gaming machine in which a gaming state in which a player can obtain a large amount of prize balls is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169630).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the movable member (opening / closing member 28b) is arranged in another detection area (variable start winning opening 28a), the movable member that opens / closes the predetermined detection area is provided. It is not arranged and is configured so that the game ball can always pass through a predetermined detection area. In the normal state, the game method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side of the game area is recommended, but in particular, a game beginner or the like may accidentally fire the game ball so as to flow down to the right side of the game area.

When the passage of the game ball is detected in the predetermined detection area, in addition to the lottery for opening the movable accessory (small hit lottery), a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is also performed, and the special symbol lottery is performed. When a big hit occurs, a penalty is imposed as a game state after the big hit ends, and a game that is more disadvantageous than the normal state is forced. For beginners, they may be skeptical that they have been penalized for no apparent reason, and their interest in the game machine may diminish, creating a situation where they fail to acquire new players. That is, there is a problem that it is not friendly to game beginners and lacks equality.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, by maintaining the guiding means in the first state, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detecting means, and in this state, the second detecting means. Guidance of the game ball to (predetermined detection area) can be suppressed. As a result, by using the guiding means, it is possible to prevent the second detecting means from passing the game ball, and it is possible to improve the equality of the game.

The guide means may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion are integrally formed, or the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion may be formed separately.

In the game machine A1, the downstream side portion can prevent the guidance of the game ball to the second detection means in the first state, and guides the game ball to the first detection means in the second state. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be preventable.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the detection means through which the game ball flowing down via the guide means can be switched by the downstream side portion.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the guide means includes an intermediate portion that allows the game ball received by the predetermined portion to flow down toward the downstream side portion.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the intermediate portion guides the game ball flowing down via the guide means to the first detection means or the second detection means. It is possible to prolong the unclear state.

The intermediate portion may be configured to be displaceable in response to the displacement of the downstream side portion, or may be configured not to be displaced regardless of the displacement of the downstream side portion.

In the game machine A3, the intermediate portion is configured so that the flow direction of the game ball does not change in either the first state or the second state, and the guide to the first detection means or the second detection means is provided on the downstream side. A game machine A4 characterized by being performed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the guidance means is switched between the first state and the second state when the game ball after entering the ball entry area is guided in the middle portion. Even so, since it does not affect the flow direction of the game ball in the intermediate portion, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the state change of the guiding means is grasped from the change in the flow mode of the game ball being guided in the intermediate portion. it can.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the guide means is arranged at a position where the predetermined portion restricts the entry of the ball from the entry region to the guide means in the first state, and in the second state. The gaming machine A5, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged at a position that allows the ball to enter the guide means from the ball entry area.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A4, it is possible to switch whether or not a new game ball can enter the guide means by switching the state of the guide means.

In addition, attention can be paid to the passage of the game ball in the predetermined portion and the passage of the game ball in the downstream side portion. That is, the line of sight of the player can be gathered at a plurality of positions, and the points of interest of the guiding means can be increased.

In the game machine A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream side portion are executed at the same time.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, switching is executed at different positions at the same time. Therefore, the player can select either the switching in the predetermined portion or the switching in the downstream side portion. It is possible to impart the playability of making it visible.

In the game machine A5, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream side portion are executed at different timings.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A5, switching at different positions is executed at different timings, so that the player can see the switching at the predetermined portion and the switching at the downstream side. It is possible to give a game property that it can be visually recognized by shifting it. In addition, it is possible to guide the movement of the player's line of sight.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the predetermined portion of the game machine A8 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, it is possible to avoid conspicuous movement of a predetermined portion in the front view. The predetermined part is a part for switching whether or not the ball can enter the guiding means, and is not a place where it is determined whether the ball is guided by the first detecting means or the second detecting means, so that the predetermined part is not conspicuous. As a result, the movement of the downstream side can be made relatively conspicuous.

A9 of the game machines A1 to A8, wherein the downstream side portion is displaced in a rotational motion manner.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the downstream side portion as a place where it is determined whether to be guided by the first detection means or the second detection means. You can make the movement of.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, the guiding means is a flow distance of a game ball flowing down from the predetermined portion to the downstream side portion rather than a front view distance between the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion. A10 is a game machine characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A9, the player looks from the predetermined part to the downstream side before the game ball flowing from the predetermined part reaches the downstream side. It can be easily moved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, the game machine A11 is characterized in that the guide means includes a preventive means for preventing a game ball that does not pass through the predetermined portion from reaching the downstream side portion.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A10, the flow path of the game ball reaching the downstream side can be restricted by the preventive means, so that the path not intended by the game ball. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the downstream side and enters the wrong detection means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, the guiding means receives the plurality of game balls from the entry region in the first period rather than the first period in which the predetermined portion receives the plurality of game balls. The game machine A12 is characterized in that the second period in which the game ball passes through the downstream side portion can be shortened.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A11, the guide means causes a shift in the passage timing of the game ball on the downstream side rather than a shift in the timing at which the predetermined portion receives the game ball. Since it can be made smaller, it is possible to increase the permissible range of the timing deviation of receiving the game ball in the predetermined part while maintaining the accuracy of switching the flow direction of the game ball in the downstream side, providing a comfortable game. It can be made easier.

In the game machine A12, the predetermined portion is configured to have a shape in which a load in a direction for accelerating the game ball is applied to the game ball when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect of the game machine A12, a load in the direction of accelerating the game ball is generated when the displacement of the predetermined portion occurs, so that the predetermined portion passes through the predetermined portion before the displacement. By accelerating the game balls arranged on the predetermined portion when the predetermined portion is displaced toward the game balls, it is possible to create a situation in which the distance between the game balls is shortened.

<Extend the flow path>
In a game machine including a ball entry region, a flow-down means for causing a game ball entering the ball entry region to flow down to a downstream region, and a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball flowing down the downstream side region. The flow-down means includes a first movable portion that allows the game ball to flow down, a second movable portion that is arranged downstream of the first movable portion and allows the game ball to flow down, and the first movable portion and the second movable portion. The game machine B1 is provided with a predetermined portion arranged between the two, and allowing the game ball to flow down.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine including a detection sensor capable of entering a game ball and a movable member for guiding the game ball to the detection sensor (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). ).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the flow path of the game ball toward the detection sensor is limited to the length of the movable member, the flow of the game ball tends to be monotonous, which may make the player bored. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow mode of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the flow-down means arranged on the upstream side of the detection means includes a plurality of movable parts that sandwich the predetermined part, it is possible to easily give variations in the length and shape of the movable parts. , The flow mode of the game ball can be improved.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the first movable portion includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the predetermined portion in the vertical direction at least at a downstream end portion.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the game ball can be flown to the predetermined part through the overlapping part, so that the game ball falls off between the first movable part and the predetermined part. Can be easily prevented.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the first movable portion is provided with an inclined portion for directing the flow direction of the game ball toward the predetermined portion side, at least at the downstream end portion.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the flow direction of the game ball can be moved toward the predetermined part by the inclined portion, so that even if the flow of the game ball is disturbed, the flow of the game ball can be disturbed. It is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling off between the first movable portion and the predetermined portion.

<Dense game balls on the downstream side>
In a game machine including a ball entry region, a flow-down means for causing a game ball entering the ball entry region to flow down to a downstream region, and a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball flowing down the downstream side region. The flow-down means is characterized by comprising a predetermined means for allowing a plurality of game balls that have entered the ball entry region at predetermined intervals to make the interval at which the plurality of game balls flow down the downstream side region shorter than the predetermined interval. Game machine BZ1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball flows down from a predetermined ball entry area, the load given from the game ball makes it possible to guide the game ball to the first detection means or the second detection means. A plurality of movable accessories that can be configured in two types of open states are arranged, and each of the movable accessories is in an open state by transmitting a mechanical load when a predetermined number of game balls enter the prize ball opening. There are gaming machines configured to close from (see, eg, JP-A-2016-202338).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the game ball is normally maintained in a state where neither the first detection means nor the second detection means guide the game ball, the first detection means for guiding the game ball to the first detection means. It can be switched to a total of three states, a state and a second state that guides the game ball to the second detection means. In any of the states, the flow path of the game ball after entering the ball entry area is one. It is considered to be the main road, and the timing (interval) of entering the ball entry area and the timing (interval) of paying out the prize ball accompanying the entry are almost the same, so that the benefit given to the player is generated. There is a problem that the timing of playing is limited to the firing interval (fixed interval) of the game ball, it is difficult to adjust the speed of the game, and it is difficult to enhance the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BZ1, a predetermined means of the flow-down means causes a case where the interval at which the game ball flows down the downstream region is shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters the entry area. Therefore, it is possible to cause a case where the game ball flows down the downstream region at an interval shorter than the firing interval of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid that the timing of generating the profit given to the player by the game ball entering the ball entry area becomes a fixed interval, and by slowing down the game, the player's interest can be enjoyed. Can be enhanced.

In the game machine BZ1, the predetermined means is configured to make the flow speed of the game ball on the entry region side higher than the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side region side. BZ2.

According to the game machine BZ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ1, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball flowing down the downstream side region side is caught up with the game ball on the entry area side by a predetermined means. ..

In the game machine BZ1 or BZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be displaceable in one direction or the other direction, and with respect to the game ball that has entered the ball entry region by the displacement in the one direction or the displacement in the other direction. The gaming machine BZ3 is configured so as to be able to give a predetermined load toward the downstream region.

According to the game machine BZ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ1 or BZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be reciprocally displaceable, and the game means flows down the flow-down means when the flow-down means is displaced in one direction. , The flow mode can be changed depending on whether the flow means flows down when the flow means is displaced in the other direction.

In the game machine BZ3, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means is arranged at either a non-branch position where branching does not occur in the flow-down direction of the game ball or a branch position where branching can occur in the flow-down direction of the game ball. A game machine BZ4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine BZ4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ3, the game ball is watched while the game ball is flowing down the flow-down means as compared with the case where the game ball is arranged at the branch position. It is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player.

In the game machine BZ4, the game machine BZ5 is characterized in that the branch position is arranged on the side where the visibility is higher than the non-branch position.

According to the game machine BZ5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ4, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player who gazes at the game ball.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the side where visibility becomes high. For example, it may be on the side close to the player (front side), on the side that is difficult to be hidden by the game ball flowing down the game area, or on the side that does not dazzle when a light emitting effect such as an LED occurs. It may be.

In the game machine BZ4 or BZ5, the branch position is arranged at the first position on the ball entry region side and the second position on the downstream side of the first position, and the first position and the second position are arranged. The gaming machine BZ6, characterized in that the non-branch position is arranged between and.

According to the game machine BZ6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ4 or BZ5, when the game ball flows down on the flow-down means, it is arranged at the branch position twice at intervals, so that one game is played. When the ball is guided by the flow-down means, the player's attention can be improved at two timings. As a result, the attention to the game ball can be efficiently improved.

In any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ6, the flow-down means is characterized in that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane on the ball entry region side is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane on the downstream side region side. ..

According to the game machine BZ7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ6, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means is further accelerated on the entry area side, and the distance from the game ball on the downstream side area side. Can be shortened.

In any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ7, the game machine BZ8 is characterized in that the ball entry region is larger than the downstream side region.

According to the game machine BZ8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ7, it is possible to facilitate a plurality of game balls to enter the ball entry area at the same time, and the game balls are densely packed in the downstream area. It is possible to facilitate the occurrence of a (continuous) state.

In the game machine BZ8, the game machine BZ9 is characterized in that the ball entry area is configured to be divided and arranged at a plurality of places.

According to the game machine BZ9, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ8, since a plurality of locations for entering the game ball into the flow-down means are prepared, the frequency of the game ball entering the flow-down means can be increased.

In the game machine BZ9, the game machine BZ10 is characterized in that the flow path of the game ball flowing down to the flow-down means is different according to the difference in the entry area where the game ball enters.

According to the game machine BZ10, in addition to the effect of the game machine BZ9, the period until the game ball passes through the flow-down means, the arrangement of the game balls on the flow-down means, and the like, the game ball enters any entry area. Since it can change depending on whether the ball is hit or not, it is possible to raise the player's interest in which entry area the game ball that entered the flow-down means entered from, and to the entry region. Can improve the attention of.

A game machine characterized in that any one of the game machines BZ1 to BZ10 is provided with a flow path limiting means for preventing the game ball flowing down the flow means from deviating from the flow path toward the downstream region. BZ11.

According to the game machine BZ11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ10, the flow path limiting means is configured to ensure that the game ball that has entered the ball entry area reaches the downstream area. Can be done.

<Technical concept of receiving a game ball at a position away from the ball entry area>
To the switching means that can switch the state between the first state that enables the game ball to be guided to the entry area and the second state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the entry area, and the switching means. The game machine C1 includes a flow-down area in which the game ball can flow down toward the ball, and the flow-down area is arranged on a side of the switching means away from the ball entry area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the landing position of the game ball on a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the game ball can be guided to the prize ball mouth and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the prize ball mouth is restricted. However, there are a plurality of positions on the downstream side near the prize ball mouth and on the upstream side on the upstream side of the downstream position, and the game ball can be landed on the downstream side position or the upstream side position. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to pass through the prize ball opening (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-029531).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, another game ball lands at the downstream position at the timing when the game ball landing at the upstream side position approaches the prize ball opening, and a plurality of game balls are gathered together at the prize ball opening. There is a problem that the ball may be clogged or the flow resistance of the game ball may increase when trying to pass through the ball. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the flow mode of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the game ball is configured to flow down to the switching means on the side away from the ball entry area (because the landing position of the game ball on the switching means is restricted). ), The game balls can be aligned while flowing down the switching means, and when trying to pass through the entry area, avoiding ball clogging or increasing flow resistance of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of improving the flow mode of the game ball.

The game machine C1 is characterized in that the game machine C1 is provided with a preventive means for preventing the flow to the switching means outside the flow area.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the prevention means can prevent the game ball from reaching the switching means through the outside of the flow down region.

In the game machine C2, the switching means is characterized in that at least a part thereof is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the game board constituting the game area.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the position where the game ball lands on the switching means is made to appear at least on the game area side (front of the game board), and at least a part of the other part is more than the front of the game board. By disposing it on the rear side, it is possible to narrow the length of the switching means eroding the game area while ensuring the flow length of the game ball on the switching means behind the front surface of the game board. As a result, a wide area for arranging other configurations can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the switching means includes a first part in which the game ball can roll, and a second part arranged on the downstream side of the first part, from the flow-down region. The game machine C4, wherein the game ball that lands on the switching means is configured to easily land on the first part.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, by rolling on the switching means over a long distance, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball and calm the flow, and the ball enters. The length of flow to the area can be secured, and the attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine C4, the switching means is provided with a guide path capable of bridging a game ball in the first state and the second state between the first part and the second part. Machine C5.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the guidance of the game ball after landing on the first part of the switching means as a place where the rolling of the game ball is maintained regardless of the state of the switching means. Since the path is arranged, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow of the game ball as compared with the case where the state switching of the switching means and the change of the flow mode of the game ball correspond one-to-one.

The game machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of types of flow lengths of game balls in the guide path are configured.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C5, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow of the game ball.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as a factor which changes the flow length of a game ball in a guide path. For example, it may be configured to change depending on the difference in the position of entering the ball into the switching means, or may be configured to change depending on the relative relationship between the timing of entering the ball into the switching means and the timing at which the state of the switching means is switched. May be done.

In the game machine C5 or C6, the switching means includes an approach means for moving the game ball so as to approach the guide path side over a predetermined range on the upstream side of the guide path. C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5 or C6, the game ball can be brought closer to the guide path side in advance of the timing when the game ball gets on the guide path by the approaching means, so that the game ball can be moved to the guide path. It is possible to avoid the retention of the game ball at the bridging portion of.

In the game machine C7, the approaching means is an inclined surface that moves the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball in the first part of the switching means or the guide path.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, since the flow direction of the game ball in the first part or the guide part of the switching means and the inclination direction of the inclined surface are orthogonal to each other, the game ball is formed by the inclined surface. The load applied to the ball does not accelerate or decelerate the flow speed of the game ball in the first part or the guide part of the switching means, and the influence can be minimized.

A game machine C9 in any of the game machines C4 to C8, wherein the second part is configured to limit the acceptance of a plurality of game balls at the same time.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C4 to C8, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a game ball more than expected enters the second part.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, the switching means is in a state between the time when the game ball lands in the predetermined section on the end side of the flow-down region side and the time when the game ball passes through the predetermined section. The game machine C10 is provided with a ball entry restricting means for restricting the game ball from entering the guide path side when the player is switched.

According to the game machine C10, when the switching means executes the state switching in a minute time in any of the game machines C1 to C9, it is easy to prevent the game ball from accidentally entering the guide path side. be able to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, the switching means is provided with a deceleration means for reducing the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side portion of the game machine C11.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the flow mode of the game ball can be calmed down (rectified) on the downstream side of the switching means.

<Multiple hits are affected by the previous hit and easily pass through the detection means>
The flow-down region where the game ball can flow down, the downstream side region arranged on the downstream side of the flow-down region, the first flow-down region where the game ball can flow down through the downstream side region, and the downstream side region. It is provided with a second flow-down region in which a game ball that has passed but does not flow down the first flow-down region can flow down, and a predetermined benefit is obtained when the game ball flows down the second flow-down region. The game ball can be given to the player, and the game ball flows down from the flow-down region to the downstream side region in a state where the game ball is not arranged in the downstream side region, as compared with the first case where the game ball flows down to the downstream side region. In the second case where the game ball flows down from the flow-down region to the downstream side region in the state where the ball is arranged, the game ball is configured to easily flow down the second flow-down region. The game machine D1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port and a specific ball entry port are arranged behind the opening / closing means, and the specific ball entry port is closed by a sliding plate member and the plate member retracts. When the plate member is in a state where the ball is allowed to enter, most of the game balls accepted by the opening / closing means enter the specific entry port. (For example, paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122) are configured to be configured so that the subsequent gaming state is set to a gaming state advantageous to the player by entering the ball into the specific entry port. reference).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is considered that the ball enters the specific entry port when one game ball is accepted by the opening / closing means, so that the player can feel relieved and the second and subsequent balls can be relieved. There is a problem that it is difficult to pay attention to the entry of the ball into the opening / closing means. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the game ball accepted by the opening / closing means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, among the game balls accepted in the downstream region, the game balls received in the plurality of games balls are second than the game balls received in the first one. Since it is configured to be more likely to be accepted by the flow-down region, it is possible to maintain the attention to the game ball that has flowed down to the downstream region.

In the game machine D1, the game ball entered in the second and subsequent balls is more easily entered in the second flow down region than the game ball entered in the downstream region with the first ball. A game machine D2 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the player's attention to the game ball that has flowed down into the flow-down area can be maintained for a long time.

The game machine D1 or D2 is characterized in that when a plurality of game balls are simultaneously arranged in the downstream area, the game balls are easily flowed down in the second flow-down area. D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the player's attention to the game ball that has flowed down into the flow-down area can be maintained while the game ball is arranged in the downstream area. it can. In addition, the player can be made aware of the launch mode of the game ball.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that a plurality of game balls are stopped in the downstream side region so that the game balls can be easily accepted in the second flow down region. ..

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, attention can be paid to the arrangement mode of the game balls in the downstream region.

The downstream of the game machines D1 to D4 is provided with an opening / closing means capable of switching between a first state in which the flow path of the game ball from the flow area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state. The side region is configured so that the game ball is not easily guided to the second flow-down region side immediately after the opening / closing means is switched from the second state to the first state. ..

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, it is possible to prolong the maintenance period of the player's attention to the downstream region after the opening / closing means is switched to the first state. it can.

In the game machine D5, the game ball that has entered the downstream region for a predetermined period from the time when the opening / closing means is switched to the first state is more likely to be the game ball that has entered after the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is configured to easily flow down the second flow-down region.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the attention force to the downstream region can be maintained for a long time from the time when the opening / closing means is switched to the first state.

In the game machine D6, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the opening / closing means is switched to the first state, the period until the game ball flowing down the flow down region flows down the second flow down region. A game machine D7 characterized in that changes can be suppressed.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the flow-down mode (flow-down period) of the game ball after the opening / closing means is switched to the first state and a predetermined period has elapsed is made constant, so that the downstream side It can reduce the attention in the area and relax the player.

In any of the game machines D5 to D7, the game ball that enters the flow-down region with the first ball after the opening / closing means is switched from the second state to the first state is inserted into the second flow-down region. The game machine D8 is provided with a guide ball selection means configured so as not to guide the player to the area side.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D5 to D7, a plurality of game balls are inserted in the first state of the opening / closing means in order to accept the game balls in the second flow area. Since the need arises, it is possible to improve the attention to the opening / closing means and the number of game balls passing through the opening / closing means.

A feature of any of the game machines D1 to D8 is that the number of game balls accepted in the second flow-down region is equal to the number of game balls not accepted in the second flow-down region. Game machine D9 to play.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D8, an excessively large number of game balls may be accepted, such as when the whole ball enters the second flow down region. It is possible to avoid giving the player excessive expectations.

In any of the game machines D1 to D9, the maximum number of game balls that can be accepted by the downstream side region is set, and the game balls that exceed the maximum number are received in the second flow down region. The featured game machine D10.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D9, it is possible to improve the attention to the downstream side region and the second flow down region.

In any of the game machines D1 to D10, the game machine D11 is characterized in that the flow area can be arranged at a position where the passing game ball easily flows into the first flow area side.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D10, a state in which the game ball arranged in the downstream side region easily flows into the first flow down region side is easily configured.

The game machine D12 is characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D11 is provided with a retention means for holding the game ball arranged in the downstream side region in the downstream side region.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D11, the flow of the game ball arranged in the first flow down region to the second flow down region side can be restricted by the retention means.

A game machine D13, wherein in any of the game machines D1 to D12, the second flow-down region is arranged above the first flow-down area.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D12, the game ball arranged in the first flow-down area is prevented from flowing to the second flow-down area side by the height difference of the arrangement. Can be done.

<Switching between contact with the game ball and non-contact>
An opening / closing means that can be switched between a flow-down region in which the game ball can flow down, a first state in which the path of the game ball passing through the flow-down region is opened, and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state, and the flow-down A downstream region disposed on the downstream side of the region, a first flow-down region in which a game ball that has passed through the downstream region can flow down, and a game ball that has passed through the downstream region. 1 A second flow-down region in which a game ball that does not flow down the flow-down region can flow down, a contact state in which the game ball can come into contact with the game ball passing through the downstream region, and a non-contact state in which the game ball does not flow down. It is provided with a contactable means that can be switched by the above, and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down region, a predetermined benefit can be given to the player, and the game ball comes into contact with the contactable means. The gaming machine E1 is configured so that the opening / closing means can be switched from the first state to the second state while in the state.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members are arranged in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member, and the flow path of the game ball receives a load from the movable member. There are gaming machines that can change (see, for example, JP-A-2017-000562).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the movable member is configured so as to be able to come into contact with the flowing game ball without fail, the flow mode of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance does not change, and the player can be seen. There is a problem that there is a high possibility of getting bored and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the contactable means can be switched between a contact state capable of contacting the game ball passing through the downstream region and a non-contact state in which the contact is non-contact. Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball can be significantly different depending on whether the game ball comes into contact with the abuttable means or not. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow mode of the game ball, and it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

The game machine E1 is characterized in that a game ball that receives a load via a game ball that is in contact with the contactable means can flow down the second flow-down region.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the game ball in the downstream region.

In the game machine E1 or E2, when the opening / closing means is switched from the second state to the first state while the game ball is in contact with the contactable means, the flow-down region to the downstream side region The game machine E3 is configured so that the game ball that has flowed down can flow down the second flow-down area.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, when the game ball is in contact with the contactable means at the timing when the opening / closing means is opened, the opening / closing means is opened and closed after the opening / closing means is opened. Since the game ball that has passed through the means can easily flow down the second flow-down region, it is possible to improve the attention to the contactable means.

<The game ball is accepted in the second game area after the passage of the game ball can be stopped>
An opening / closing means that can be switched between a flow-down region in which the game ball can flow down, a first state in which the path of the game ball passing through the flow-down region is opened, and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state, and the flow-down A downstream region disposed on the downstream side of the region, a first flow-down region in which a game ball that has passed through the downstream region can flow down, and a game ball that has passed through the downstream region. It is provided with a second flow-down area in which a game ball that does not flow down the flow-down area can flow down, and a predetermined benefit can be given to the player when the game ball flows down in the second flow-down area. The game machine EZ1 is characterized in that the state in which the passage of the game ball in the predetermined portion of the downstream side region is prevented is shifted to the state in which the game ball can flow down to the second flow-down region.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port and a specific ball entry port are arranged behind the opening / closing means, and the specific ball entry port is closed by a sliding plate member and the plate member retracts. When the plate member is in a state where the ball is allowed to enter, most of the game balls accepted by the opening / closing means enter the specific entry port. There is a gaming machine in which the gaming state is set to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player by entering the ball into the specific entry port (see, for example, paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP-A-2015-150122). ..

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the positions of the ball entry port and the specific ball entry port are almost the same except for the difference between the left and right, so whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry port is opened and closed. It is difficult to grasp at a glance through the means. When a notification is sent to the liquid crystal device due to a game ball entering a specific entry port, the display on the liquid crystal device is easier to understand, so that the player's attention is focused on the liquid crystal device. There was a problem that it would end up. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the game ball accepted by the opening / closing means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EZ1, the game ball is configured to flow down to the second flow-down region after the passage of the game ball is prevented from passing through the predetermined portion of the downstream region. The player's line of sight can be focused on the game ball stopped in the downstream area as a preparation state for entering the area, and the attention to the game ball accepted by the opening / closing means can be maintained.

In the game machine EZ1, the predetermined portion is located in the first flow-down region of the game machine EZ2.

According to the game machine EZ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ1, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entering the first flow-down area as a region that does not affect the imparting of a predetermined profit.

In the game machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is the game machine EZ3 characterized in that the passage of the game ball is prevented by the predetermined game ball.

According to the game machine EZ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ1 or EZ2, even if the game ball deviates from the second flow-down area and flows down, the game is expected to block a predetermined portion. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the sphere.

In the game machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing by a predetermined member different from the game ball, and the size of the predetermined member in front view is set smaller than the size of the game ball. The game machine EZ4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine EZ4, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ1 or EZ2, a predetermined member for preventing the passage of the game ball can be made less noticeable than the game ball, so that the attention to the game ball is improved. Can be made to.

In any of the game machines EZ1 to EZ4, after the first flow-down region is filled with the game balls, the game balls that arrive afterwards are configured to be accepted into the second flow-down region. Game machine EZ5.

According to the game machine EZ5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines EZ1 to EZ4, the player's line of sight can be shifted from the first flow-down area to the second flow-down area. The period during which the second flow-down region is visually recognized can be lengthened as compared with the case where the second flow-down region is focused on.

Further, when the ball enters the second flow-down area, the first flow-down area is filled with the game ball, so even if the game ball that has entered the second flow-down area is lost, the ball enters the second flow-down area at a glance. It can be grasped that it is possible.

The game machine EZ5 includes a state switching means that can be switched between a staying state in which the game ball is fastened in the first flow-down area and a discharge state in which the game ball is discharged from the first flow-down area. The gaming machine EZ6, characterized in that the state of the state switching means can be switched in response to the switching of the state.

According to the game machine EZ6, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ5, the state switching between the opening / closing means and the state switching means can be associated with each other, so that it is easy to predict the state of the other by visually recognizing one of them. can do.

The game machine EZ7 is characterized in that, in the game machine EZ5 or EZ6, an upper limit number of game balls that can be accepted is set in the first flow-down region.

According to the game machine EZ7, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ5 or EZ6, by checking the number of game balls arranged in the first flow-down area, how many more game balls can be passed through the flow-down area. For example, it is possible to easily predict whether the game ball will be accepted in the second flow area.

In any of the game machines EZ1 to EZ7, a displacement means configured to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement means is in a dischargeable state in which the received game ball can be discharged to the downstream region, and the received game ball is described. The gaming machine EZ8 is characterized in that it is displaced to the downstream region so as to switch the state between the non-dischargeable state and the non-dischargeable state.

According to the game machine EZ8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines EZ1 to EZ7, the game ball is discharged to the downstream area where the player's attention is high as a prerequisite for accepting the game ball into the second flow down area. Since it is configured to change depending on the state of the displacement means, it is possible to improve the attention to the downstream region and the displacement means.

That is, when the game balls that have passed through the flow-down region surely flow down to the downstream region, the timing at which the game balls flow down into the second flow-down region can be predicted from experience by grasping the number of game balls that pass through the flow-down region. Therefore, there is a possibility that the disadvantage is not great even if the game is played without looking at the downstream area.

On the other hand, in a situation where the presence or absence of the game ball flowing down to the downstream area can be switched depending on the state of the displacement means, the number of game balls passing through the flow down area and the number of game balls flowing down to the downstream area are determined. Since there is a displacement, it is necessary to direct the line of sight to the downstream area as well. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the downstream region.

In the game machine EZ8, the displacement means is configured to be able to decelerate the flow speed of the received game ball in comparison with the flow speed of the game ball flowing down in the flow region.

According to the game machine EZ9, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ8, the flow speed of the game ball accepted by the displacement means can be reduced, so that the player loses sight of the game ball accepted by the displacement means. Can be easily avoided.

In the game machine EZ8 or EZ9, the displacement means includes a ball receiving portion capable of receiving up to a predetermined number of game balls, and the displacement of the displacement means causes the game balls received by the ball receiving portion to be displaced. Amusement machine EZ10.

According to the game machine EZ10, in addition to the effect of the game machine EZ8 or EZ9, the number of game balls displaced due to the displacement of the displacement means can be limited to a predetermined number with respect to the ball receiving portion. By setting the displacement speed of the means within a predetermined range, the number of game balls that can be discharged from the displacement means to the downstream region in a predetermined period can be suppressed within a predetermined range.

<Notification means to notify the end point at the ending>
The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game, and a notification means for notifying the player of the end of the duration of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp it.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that shift to a state in which special figure variable games are possible when the jackpot game is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, with the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to know the end time of the jackpot game, and it becomes a source of dissatisfaction for the player who wants to start the lottery of the special symbol immediately after switching to the state where the special figure variable game is possible. Was there.

For example, as a general game progress, there is a distribution in which after a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1, after the big hit game is completed, the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 is easily acquired. There is a game machine, but in such a game machine, the lottery of the special symbol 2 starts immediately after the end of the jackpot game, so if the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended, the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game If the lottery of 1 is executed and a big hit is won in the lottery, there is a possibility that the player is disadvantaged.

In order to avoid this situation, it is preferable to win the lottery of the special symbol 2 after the end of the big hit as soon as possible before winning the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 1 after the end of the jackpot. It is desirable to start firing the game ball as soon as the lottery of 2 can be obtained.

On the other hand, in order to win the lottery for the special symbol 2, the entrance is generally opened and closed by an electric accessory, but the electric accessory is maintained in a closed state during the jackpot game. It will be in a state where it can be opened after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired before the electric accessory is released, most of the balls are likely to be wasted balls.

Due to these circumstances, even if the game ball is fired to the electric character side during the jackpot game, the electric character remains closed and the lottery for special symbol 2 cannot be won, so it is desirable to avoid launching the game ball. In addition to that, as soon as the jackpot game is completed to win the lottery of special symbol 2 before winning the jackpot by the lottery of special symbol 1, the ball entrance on the downstream side of the opened electric accessory It is thought that the player wants to hit the game ball into the ball.

On the other hand, with the conventional game machine, it is difficult to know when the jackpot game will end, and there is a problem that it is difficult to determine the timing of launching the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since the player is provided with a notification means for notifying the end time of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp the end time, the timing for launching the game ball is set with the notification of the notification means as a guide. It can be easily planned.

In the game machine G1, at least one of the first effect or the second effect whose notification content is different from that of the first effect is executed, and the duration can be changed by the combination of the notifications. The notification means is configured so that the difference in the duration of the predetermined effect can be transmitted to the player, and the end means indicating the end time point of the predetermined effect and the time notification indicating the time elapsed from the present time to the end point point. A game machine G2 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, even when a plurality of types of durations of the predetermined effects are prepared, the duration of the predetermined effects currently being performed and the end time thereof Can be grasped.

The game machine G2 is characterized in that the time notification means includes a pseudo time notification means indicating a time elapsed from the present time to the end time of the predetermined effect and a pseudo time provided with a predetermined time difference. G3.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G2, the pseudo time notification means can notify the player of a preferable timing before the end time of a predetermined effect. Thereby, for example, the time that can elapse from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the predetermined entry port can be consumed during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined entry is performed immediately after the end of the predetermined effect. It is possible to facilitate the realization of the game of flowing the game ball into the ball mouth.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the predetermined effect can be executed at least immediately before the end of the predetermined privilege game, and the mode of execution is changed according to the type of the privilege game. A game machine G4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines G1 to G3, the type of privileged game can be associated with a predetermined effect.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the game machine G5 is characterized in that the notification means notifies a time point before a predetermined period at the end of the predetermined effect period.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the end time of the predetermined effect period can be grasped in advance by the notification means.

The timing of the predetermined production period is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be in a predetermined specific game, in a symbol change, or in a symbol change standby.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, at the end of the predetermined effect, a predetermined still image or moving image for keeping the player calm is displayed in the display area of the display means. ..

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, it is possible to effectively suppress the player's devotion to the game.

In any of the game machines G1 to G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the display of the display means is switched after the end of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G6, the display can be switched so that the player can easily grasp that the end time of the predetermined effect has passed.

The game machine G7 is characterized in that, after the end of the predetermined effect, a specific effect can be continuously executed from the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, a specific effect is executed during the execution of the predetermined effect as compared with the case where a new effect is executed after the end of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long production time.

In any of the game machines G1 to G8, the game machine G9 is characterized in that the predetermined effect is visibly executed in at least a part of the display area of the display means.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G8, a predetermined effect can be confirmed by visually recognizing the display area of the display means, so that it is outside the display area of the display means (for example, It is possible to reduce the game burden on the player as compared with the case where a predetermined effect is executed outside the game area, etc.).

The game machine G8 or G9 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case where the display in the display area of the display means has a different mode at a predetermined timing.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of the game machine G8 or G9, it is possible to improve the attention to the aspect at a predetermined timing.

The different aspects at a predetermined timing are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, there are cases where the operation starts at a predetermined timing and cases where the operation is stopped and maintained at a predetermined timing, a case where the operation becomes possible at a predetermined timing, and a case where the operation becomes inoperable at a predetermined timing. Examples are different cases.

The game machine G8 or G9 is characterized in that an illusion effect is executed before the end of the predetermined effect to give the illusion that it is the end time.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G8 or G9, the concentration of the player can be enhanced for each illusion effect.

Suggestion suggesting that in any of the game machines G8 to G11, a predetermined profit can be obtained by firing a game ball in the display area of the display means from the end of the predetermined effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine G12 characterized in that it is displayed.

According to the game machine G12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G8 to G11, the player who visually recognizes the display area can be notified of the timing suitable for launching the game ball by the suggestion display. It is possible to reduce the game burden of the player.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a predetermined period may elapse, or a predetermined number of game balls have passed through a predetermined entry port, or the passage thereof may be detected.

In the game machine G12, the suggestion display is a display suggesting that the player aims at the opening / closing lottery entrance for opening / closing the predetermined ball opening or the opening / closing lottery for the electric accessory that opens / closes the predetermined entry opening. A game machine G13 characterized by.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G12, the suggestion display clarifies the aim of the launched game ball, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.

In the game machine G12 or G13, in the predetermined effect, a display that continues until a predetermined launchable timing is configured, and if the launch is not performed even after the predetermined launch timing, or the game ball is detected at the predetermined detection port. If not, the gaming machine G14 is characterized in that a predetermined notification is continued until one of the notifications is made.

According to the game machine G14, if it is confirmed that the predetermined notification is continued in addition to the effect of the game machine G12 or G13, is the game ball fired after the predetermined launch timing has passed? , It is possible to make the player know that the game ball is not detected at the predetermined detection port.

The game machine G15 is characterized in that when any of the game machines G12 to G14 detects a predetermined number of balls or more than the predetermined number of balls during the predetermined effect, a predetermined notification is given.

According to the game machine G15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G12 to G14, it is possible to notify the player that a predetermined number or more of balls have been entered during the predetermined production by a predetermined notification. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing intensity of the game ball and the like by using it as a hint, and can reduce the game burden.

It should be noted that the predetermined mode of notification is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a predetermined four-character compound word may be displayed, a display for hesitating to launch a game ball may be displayed, a predetermined light emitting means may be made to emit light, or a predetermined sound may be emitted. It may be output.

In any of the game machines G1 to G15, the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting performed by the player, or regardless of the emission intensity setting performed by the player. A game machine G16 characterized in that it is executed with a predetermined emission intensity and a predetermined emission color.

According to the game machine G16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G15, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice the sound or light by setting the player.

<Set the period for changing the volume and light intensity at the ending>
It is characterized by including an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game, and a changing means capable of configuring a changeable state in which a predetermined setting related to the game can be changed during the execution of the predetermined effect. Game machine H1 to play.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the jackpot game is completed and the special figure variable game is possible (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the player has no hands between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special figure variable game is possible, so that the player tends to hold the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that a situation in which a game ball is accidentally fired is likely to occur. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively using the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the changeable state can be configured during the predetermined production, the spare time during the predetermined production can be allocated to the time for changing the predetermined setting. it can. As a result, the player's hand can be easily separated from the handle, so that it is easy to prevent the erroneous firing of the game ball. That is, it can be improved from the viewpoint of effectively using the game ball.

The game machine H1 is provided with a notification means for notifying the end of the duration period of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp it, and the effect by the notification means is continued in the changeable state. H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when it is preferable to hold the steering wheel again after changing a predetermined setting. This makes it easier for the player to avoid suffering the disadvantage of not firing the game ball at an appropriate timing.

The game machine H3 is characterized in that, in the game machine H1 or H2, a state in which the predetermined changeable setting can be switched can be configured in the changeable state.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, there are a plurality of predetermined settings that can be changed, so that the player does not have a hand even if the player has a long free time. It is possible to make it easier to avoid becoming a mess.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the changeable state, the predetermined setting that can be changed or the predetermined setting that is being changed is displayed by the display means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3, the target to be changed in the predetermined settings related to the game can be clarified by the display. As a result, the player's playing burden can be reduced.

The game machine H5 is characterized in that, in any of the game machines H1 to H4, a visible area of a predetermined display in the display means is changed by a predetermined operation executed in the changeable state.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the player changes the visible area of the predetermined display in the display means by the predetermined operation performed by the player. A display that is considered to be of interest can be placed in front of the player's line of sight. As a result, it is possible to concentrate on the game without causing the player to feel the hassle of moving the line of sight.

The game machine H5 is characterized in that a state in which a part of the display area of the display means is invisible can be configured by a predetermined operation executed in the changeable state.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, a part of the display area of the display means becomes invisible by a predetermined operation, so that the display which may become invisible can be visually recognized. It is possible to make the player who wants to maintain think whether or not to perform a predetermined operation. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player unnecessarily performs a predetermined operation.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, when the predetermined setting is changed in the changeable state, the change is returned under the predetermined condition, or the change is invalidated under the predetermined condition. A game machine H7 characterized by.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a sense of discomfort. It can be grasped by the player.

The predetermined conditions are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the jackpot game may be started, the jackpot game may be continued a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number or more of game balls may be detected by a predetermined detection means in a predetermined period, or a predetermined number of game balls may be detected. It is also possible to operate a predetermined operating means at the timing.

In the game machine H7, the game machine H8 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is achieved by the operation of a predetermined operation means operated to execute the change of the predetermined setting.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the change of the predetermined setting can be returned or invalidated by operating the predetermined operation means, so that the change of the predetermined setting is returned. , Or it can be facilitated to intentionally invalidate.

In the game machine H7, the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing regardless of the timing at which the change of the predetermined setting is executed.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which the predetermined condition is not achieved forever.

The predetermined timing is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the special figure fluctuation may be executed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined content may be notified, or a predetermined time such as noon may be set.

In the game machine H7, the game machine H10 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is achieved when a predetermined state elapses for a predetermined time.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the change of the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated so that the player can grasp that the predetermined state has elapsed for a predetermined time. it can.

The predetermined state is not limited in any way. For example, when the jackpot game is played in a row, the jackpot type acquired may be repeated with the same (or more or less than a predetermined number of rounds), the operation means may not be operated, or the special figure may change. May not be executed.

In any of the game machines H1 to H10, a predetermined target amount can be set in advance in the predetermined setting, and in the changeable state, a difference notification that makes it possible to grasp the difference between the predetermined setting and the target amount. A game machine H11 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H10, even if the predetermined setting change is returned or invalidated, the player playing the game is the same. If so, it is possible to easily return to the state before the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated by changing the predetermined setting while grasping the difference from the target amount by the difference notification means.

As a result, when the player who plays the game is changed, the predetermined setting can be changed in consideration of the game burden given to the later player by maintaining the predetermined setting as the setting of the previous player. Even when the game machine is controlled to be returned or invalidated, the predetermined setting can be easily returned to the previous state, so that the player playing the game has not been replaced. Even if a predetermined setting is unintentionally returned or invalidated, the predetermined setting can be easily returned to the previous state, so that the game burden given to the player can be reduced.

<Display mode of the same display changes depending on the situation>
It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined display effect related to the game, and the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed during the execution of the predetermined display effect. Game machine I1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that can visually recognize an integrated shape by combining a movable accessory arranged on the front side of the display device and the display of the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -019743). However, in the conventional game machine described above, it is necessary to determine the display arrangement position, size and shape according to the arrangement position, size and shape of the movable accessory, so that the display area of the display device can be effectively utilized. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed during the execution of the predetermined display effect, so that the influence of the shape of the movable accessory It can be improved from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device without receiving the damage.

In the game machine I1, the predetermined display effect is configured so that the distinctiveness is lowered when the predetermined display effect is displayed on the edge side of the display area than when it is displayed on the center side of the display area. The featured game machine I2.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the attention power to a predetermined display effect can be adjusted depending on the position of the display area.

The mode for reducing the distinctiveness is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be displayed semi-transparently, or the size of the display may be reduced.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the game machine I3 is characterized in that the change is executed by operating a predetermined operating means.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, the player can be made to select whether or not to change the display mode of the predetermined display effect. As a result, the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased.

<Button operation entanglement>
The predetermined effect can be switched from the first state to the second state by operating the effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect related to the game and the predetermined operation means during the execution of the predetermined effect. The game machine IZ1 characterized by being provided with an effect switching means configured in.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the jackpot game is completed and the special figure variable game is possible (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the player has no hands between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special figure variable game is possible, so that the player tends to hold the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that a situation in which a game ball is accidentally fired is likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine IZ1, it is possible to switch the effect to be executed by operating the predetermined operation means during the predetermined effect, so that the spare time during the predetermined effect can be set to a predetermined time. You can devote time to operating the operating means. Since the effect can be switched by operating the operating means, it is possible to effectively increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means. As a result, the player's hand can be easily separated from the handle, so that it is easy to prevent the erroneous firing of the game ball.

The game machine IZ1 is provided with an operation notification means capable of notifying that the predetermined operation means can be operated, and by operating the predetermined operation means in accordance with the notification of the operation notification means, the mode of the predetermined effect. A game machine IZ2 characterized by being able to switch.

According to the game machine IZ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine IZ1, the operation of the predetermined operation means is assisted by the operation notification means, so that even an inexperienced player can operate the predetermined operation means without hesitation. can do.

In the game machine IZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed for a part of the duration of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine IZ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine IZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed for a part of the duration of the predetermined effect, so that the predetermined effect is visually recognized at other times. You can afford to let it.

The timing of notification from the operation notification means is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed from the middle of the predetermined effect, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed until the middle of the predetermined effect, or the predetermined effect. The notification from the operation notification means may be executed during the execution of the effect. Further, when the notification from the operation notification means is executed during the execution of the predetermined effect, the operation may be valid during the execution of the notification, or the operation may be invalidated. Is also good.

The game machine IZ4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines IZ1 to IZ3 is configured so that the effect is not switched by the operation of the predetermined operation means in a predetermined period in the latter half of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine IZ4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ3, the operation of the predetermined operation means in the latter half of the predetermined effect is invalidated, so that the predetermined operation in the latter half of the predetermined period is invalidated. You can pay attention to the production.

In the game machine IZ4, the game machine IZ5 is characterized in that the display of the operation notification means in the display area of the display means is hidden in the predetermined period in the latter half of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine IZ5, in addition to the effect of the game machine IZ4, it is possible to grasp by visually recognizing the display area of the display means that the operation of the predetermined operation means has entered the invalid period.

In any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ5, when a plurality of types of effects that can be switched by the operation of the predetermined operation means are prepared, the attached notification for predicting the effect to be executed by the operation of the predetermined operation means. A game machine IZ6 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the game machine IZ6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ5, the effect executed by the operation of the predetermined operation means can be predicted by the attached notification means, so that the predetermined operation means is also operated. Regardless, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment and labor that the player has switched to an unexpected effect, and the player only has to operate the predetermined operation means when the effect is switched to the desired effect. It is possible to eliminate the hassle of operating.

In any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ6, the game machine IZ7 is characterized in that the operation of the predetermined operation means can be performed from the middle of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine IZ7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ6, it is possible to pay attention to a predetermined effect until the operation of the predetermined operation means becomes possible.

In the game machine IZ6 or IZ7, the attached notification means has a display for suggesting a specific operation timing, and the specific operation timing secures a predetermined adjustment period by the end time of the predetermined effect. A game machine IZ8 characterized in that it is set as a possible timing.

According to the game machine IZ8, in addition to the effect of the game machine IZ6 or IZ7, the specific operation timing can be changed depending on the length of the adjustment period. Therefore, after the predetermined operation means is operated from the specific operation timing. You can expect the development of the production.

The game machine IZ9 is characterized in that, in any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ8, the mode of the effect switched by operating the predetermined operating means is returned to the mode before the switching under predetermined conditions.

According to the game machine IZ9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ8, the state before the mode of the effect is switched under the predetermined conditions is returned, so that the predetermined operation means can be operated again. .. As a result, the number of operations of the predetermined operation means can be increased, and the atmosphere in which the player participates in the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines IZ2 to the game machine IZ9, the notification from the operation notification means is provided with a plurality of types in which the number of the predetermined operation means to be operated at the same time is different. IZ10.

According to the game machine IZ10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines IZ2 to IZ9, there are cases where the number of predetermined operating means to be operated at the same time is one and cases where the number is two or more. Therefore, by intentionally operating the two predetermined operation means, it is possible to distract the time at the timing when it is not necessary to launch the game ball and to be absorbed in the game. In this case, since the player's hand can be separated from the handle for launching the ball, it is possible to suppress the erroneous launch of the game ball and avoid the occurrence of unnecessary disadvantages due to the wasted game ball being launched. Can be done.

In any of the game machines IZ2 to IZ10, the notification from the operation notification means includes a notification executed when a predetermined profit obtained when the ball enters a predetermined entry port becomes the upper limit. The featured game machine IZ11.

According to the game machine IZ11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines IZ2 to IZ10, by visually recognizing the notification from the operation notification means, a predetermined benefit obtained when the ball enters a predetermined entry port can be obtained. It is possible to let the player know that the upper limit has been reached.

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3 and IZ1 to IZ11. The game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3 and IZ1 to IZ11. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3 and IZ1 to IZ11. The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (game board)
22 Frame button (part of operation means)
64b 3rd winning opening (detection means, 2nd detection means, 1st detection means)
66,67 Through gate (opening and closing lottery entrance)
81 Third symbol display device (part of effect executing means, part of notification means, part of changing means, part of effect switching means, part of operation notification means, display means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of effect execution means, part of notification means, part of change means, part of effect switching means, part of operation notification means)
410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
413 Central opening (placed behind part of ball entry area, part of downstream area, part of branch position (second position))
414 Ball passage opening (part of the ball entry area)
420 Pre-design member (part of preventive measures)
422 Joint (part of guide means, preventive means)
423 Partition plate (part of guidance means, prevention means)
428 Ball guide ridge (part of downstream area)
430 Middle stage member (part of flow path limiting means)
431 Central flow path (part of guide means, intermediate part, part of flow-down means, part of non-branch position, part of guide path, predetermined part)
440 Upper member (part of flow path limiting means)
450 slide member (part of guide means, part of flow-down means, part of switching means, first movable part)
451 Tip (predetermined part, first part)
452 Left guide plate (part of predetermined means, part of non-branch position)
452a Inclined surface (approaching means, overlapping, inclined)
453 Right guide plate (part of predetermined means, part of non-branch position)
453a Inclined surface (approaching means, overlapping, inclined)
470 Tilt member (placed in a part of the guide means, downstream side, part of the branch position (second position), second part, second movable part)
640 Second winning opening (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
640a Electric accessory (part of guidance means, part of switching means)
700a 2nd specified winning opening (flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
715 Storage plate part (part of downstream area, part of first flow down area, part of guide ball selection means, part of retention means)
730 Moving top lid member (opening and closing means)
740 Moving floor member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
751 Opening (second flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
782 Ball opening (part of the first flow down area)
810 Specific display (part of the predetermined display effect)
811 time display (part of notification means, time notification means)
812 Termination position (part of notification means, termination means)
813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
815 Caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
819 Second caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
B3 sphere arrangement (part of branch position, 1st position)
DR1 path (part of the flow area)
2458a Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
2458b Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
5770 Switching device (displacement means)
5772 Ball receiving recess (ball receiving part)
6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
6822 Goal suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
7817 Past light intensity display (difference notification means)
7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)

Claims (3)

A ball entry area, a guide means for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry area, and
The first detecting means, which is arranged on the downstream side of the guiding means and detects the passage of the game ball,
When the passage of the game ball is detected on the downstream side of the guide means, the game is provided with a profit different from the profit that can be given to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first detection means. With a second detection means that can be given to a person,
The guidance means
A predetermined portion for receiving the game ball flowing down from the ball entry area, and
A downstream side portion that is arranged on the downstream side of the predetermined portion and is displaced in response to the displacement of the predetermined portion is provided.
At least depending on the arrangement of the downstream side
The first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detection means,
A game machine characterized in that a state can be changed by a second state in which a game ball is easily guided to the second detection means. The downstream side portion can prevent the game ball from being guided to the second detection means in the first state, and can prevent the game ball from being guided to the first detection means in the second state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the guiding means includes an intermediate portion that allows the gaming ball received by the predetermined portion to flow down toward the downstream side portion.

Images